Truck Body Mounting Directives 01-09-2006

Truck body/equipment mounting directives
Actros (BM 93X)

Axor (BM 94X, 95X)
Atego (BM 97X)
Econic
Publication date:
01.09.2006
Update notes
Amendments made to document dated 01.12.2005

1
1.1
Introduction
The aim of these directives . . . . . . . ( page 5)
6
6.6.1
Modifications to the basic vehicle

Air-brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 105)
General
Vehicle and model designations . . ( page 11)
Technical advice and contacts. . . . ( page 33)
Body manufacturer information
portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 38)
2.6.1 Your company profile (ABH profile and
the Qualified Partner List (QPL) . . . ( page 38)
2.6.2 MBAS Web (Mercedes-Benz body/
equipment manufacturer system)
and order data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 39)
2.6.3 Partnership
and contact options . . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 39)
2.7
Workshop Information System
(WIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 40)
7
7.6.2
Types of bodies
Loading crane mounted behind
the cab on Atego (BM 97X) . . . . . ( page 201)
2
2.1
2.2
2.6
3
3.7.2
8 Calculations
8.3
Tipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4
Technical wheelbase . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1 Technical wheelbase regulation
for 3-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.2 Technical wheelbase regulation
for 4-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning of bodies
Euro 4/Euro 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 55)
4
4.1
Technical threshold values for planning

Vehicle overhang and
technical wheelbase. . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 67)
4.2.3 Stabilisers/
Telligent roll control. . . . . . . . . . . ( page 69)
4.3
Steerability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( page 70)
Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006
! Always print out complete sections from the current version.
( page 240)
( page 240)
( page 240)
( page 241)
Contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
The aim of these directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Accident prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Vehicle and model designations . . . . . . . . . . 11
Technical advice and contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Issuing certificates of endorsement. . . . . . . . 34
Certificate of endorsement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Documents required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Legal claim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Product liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ensuring traceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Warranty claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Body manufacturer information portal . . . . . . 38
Your company profile (ABH profile and the
Qualified Partner List (QPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.6.2 MBAS Web (Mercedes-Benz body/equipment
manufacturer system) and order data . . . . . . 39
2.6.3 Partnership and contact options . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.7
Workshop Information System (WIS) . . . . . . . 40
2.8
Mercedes star and logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.9
Reprocessing components recycling . . . . . 42
2.10 Quality assurance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
Planning of bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Selecting the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Vehicle modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Dimensions, weights and total vehicle
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.3.1 Observing the permissible total vehicle height
(large volume transporters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.5
Bolted and welded connections . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5.1 Bolted connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5.2 Welded connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.6
Noise insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.7
Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.7.1 Euro 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.7.2
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
Euro 4/Euro 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Maintenance instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Preparation for storing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . 62
Battery maintenance and storage . . . . . . . . . 62
Preparation for handing over the
converted vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.9
Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.10 Pneumatic auxiliary consumers . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.10.1 Maximum permissible air consumption . . . . . 66
4
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Technical threshold values for

planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Vehicle overhang and technical
wheelbases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Load distribution, height of centre of gravity,
anti-roll bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Weight distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Height of centre of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Stabiliser/Telligent roll control. . . . . . . . . . 69
Steerability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Clearance for assemblies and cab . . . . . . . . . 71
Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Telligent stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Semitrailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Gross weight of tractor/trailer
combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Damage prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Brake hoses/cables and lines. . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Mobile communications systems. . . . . . . . . . 83
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). . . . . . . 84
Welding work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Corrosion protection measures . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Leaf springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Risk of fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Contents
5.13.1 Regulations and information sheets. . . . . . . . 94

5.13.2 Safety when working with natural gas . . . . . . 95
5.13.3 Precautions for the removal of the
compressed-gas reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.13.4 Removed compressed-gas reservoirs . . . . . . 96
5.13.5 Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.13.6 Natural gas high-pressure lines . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.13.7 Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.13.8 Body mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.13.9 Access to the compressed-gas reservoirs . . . 98
5.13.10Power take-off (NA) output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.14 Storing and delivering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 99
6
Modifications to the basic vehicle. . . . . 100
6.1
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.2
Chassis frame material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.3
Drilling work on the vehicle frame . . . . . . . 102
6.4
Welding work on the vehicle frame . . . . . . 103
6.5
Reinforcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.6
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.6.1 Compressed-air brake system . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.6.2 Routing lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.6.3 Bending radii for plastic lines. . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.7
Modifications to the wheelbase . . . . . . . . . 107
6.7.1 Certificate of endorsement for modifications
to the wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.7.2 Modification to the wheelbase by moving
the rear axle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.7.3 Modification to the wheelbase by cutting
the longitudinal frame member . . . . . . . . . 109
6.7.4 Propeller shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.8
Modifications to the frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.8.1 Frame extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.8.2 Standard chassis frame extension . . . . . . . 116
6.8.3 Frame shortening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.8.4 End cross member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.9
Attachments and additional equipment . . . 119
6.9.1 Fastening to the chassis frame . . . . . . . . . 119
6.9.2 Wheel chocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.9.3 Mudguards and wheel arches . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.9.4 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.9.5 Front underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.9.6 Rear underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.9.7
6.9.8
6.10
6.10.1
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.15.1
6.15.2
6.16
6.16.1
6.16.2
6.16.3
6.16.4
6.16.5
6.16.6
6.16.7
6.16.8
6.16.9
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.22.1
6.22.2
6.23
6.23.1
6.23.2
6.23.3
6.24
6.24.1
6.25
6.25.1
6.25.2
6.25.3
6.26
Side underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Compressor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Adaptation of a crew cabin/crewcab in the
short cab (code F07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Seats and bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Leading axle/trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Retrofitting an automatic transmission . . . . 130
Electrical system /electronics . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Vehicle earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Tapping cables to control units . . . . . . . . . . 133
Power supply auxiliary consumers . . . . . . 134
Electrical consumers up to 10 amps . . . . . . 134
Explanations of cable plug
(pin assignment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Wiring diagram (current draw up to
10 amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Electrical consumers above 10 amps . . . . . 140
Installation of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Electrical wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Cable routing preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Programmable special module (PSM) . . . . . 150
Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Power take-offs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Transmission-driven power take-off (NA). . . 160
Engine-driven power take-off (NMV) . . . . . . 161
Tipper pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Engine power take-off at the front . . . . . . . . 163
Belt drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Propeller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Engine power take-off at the rear . . . . . . . . 164
Rigid drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Resilient drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Engine power take-off at the rear . . . . . . . . 167
Installation of propeller shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Types of angle offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Open-jaw coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Ball hitch coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Use of vehicle with centre-axle trailer . . . . . 173
Contents
6.27 Lowered trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.27.1 Lowered trailer coupling for centre-axle
trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.28 Semitrailer tractor vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.28.1 Semitrailer tractor chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.28.2 Standard chassis for semitrailer tractor
vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.29 Connections for brake system and
electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.5
7.6.6
7.7
7.7.1
Types of bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting frame material . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting frame design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing the mounting frame . . . . . . . . . .
Friction-locking connection
bracket mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form-locking rigid connection
tab fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick-release lock for demountable
bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-supporting bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Van and box-type bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Platform and demountable bodies . . . . . . .
Platform body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Demountable bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading crane mounted behind the cab
on Actros (BM 93X), Axor (BM 95X),
Econic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
on Atego (BM 97X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-mounted loading crane on Actros
(BM 93X), Axor (BM 95X), Econic. . . . . . . .
Rear-mounted loading crane on Atego
(BM 97X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removable loading crane. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicles with lifting trailing axle. . . . . . . . .
Tipper bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
176
178
178
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
7.7.5
7.7.6
178
179
180
180
181
182
183
187
188
189
192
193
194
194
194
195
195
196
197
197
201
203
207
209
209
210
210
7.8
7.9
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.10
7.10.1
7.10.2
7.10.3
7.11
7.12
7.12.1
7.13
7.14
7.14.1
7.14.2
8
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
Pivot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Safety fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Lifting press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Vehicles with disc brakes
on the rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Special tipper bodies on
standard chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Roll-off tippers and skip loaders . . . . . . . . . 213
Tank and dry-bulk bodies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tank and dry-bulk bodies without continuous
mounting frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Platform-mounted tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Vehicles for the transport of hazardous
goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Transport of class 2 and 3 flammable
substances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehicles for the transport of aggressive
substances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Cement mixer trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Semitrailer coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Mounting frame and
semitrailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Other bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Loading tailgate/lifting platform . . . . . . . . . 226
Mounting without mounting frame . . . . . . . 227
Loading tailgate tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Coupling devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Trailer coupling (without noseweight) . . . . . 238
Trailer coupling (with noseweight) . . . . . . . . 238
Semitrailer coupling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Axle load calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Technical wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Technical wheelbase regulation for
3-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Technical wheelbase regulation for
4-axle vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Contents
9
9.1
9.2
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSM 3 parameter data record . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission-driven
power take-off (NA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1 Mounting directives for the transmissiondriven power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2 Dimensions of the power take-off
coupling flange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3
Engine-driven power take-off (NMV) . . . . .
242
242
257
257
349
351
1 Introduction
1.1 The aim of these directives
DaimlerChrysler AG, as the manufacturer of
Mercedes-Benz vehicles, issues these body/equipment
mounting directives to provide manufacturers with important technical information about the basic vehicle.
This information must be observed by the body manufacturer in the production of bodies and equipment, fittings
and modifications for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Due to the great number of body manufacturers and
body types, DaimlerChrysler AG cannot foresee all possible changes, e.g. to road performance, stability, load
distribution, position of the vehicles centre of gravity
and its handling characteristics, caused by bodies and
their equipment, fittings and modifications. For this reason, DaimlerChrysler AG can assume no liability for accidents or injuries caused by such modifications to your
vehicle where these modifications have an adverse affect on the complete vehicle. As a manufacturer,
DaimlerChrysler AG is accordingly only liable for its own
designs and products. The body manufacturer itself, as
manufacturer of the complete vehicle, undertakes to ensure that bodies and their equipment, fittings and modifications are not faulty and that they cannot lead to
faults or hazards on the complete vehicle. If this obligation is violated in any way, the body manufacturer will assume full product liability. With these body/equipment
mounting directives, DaimlerChrysler AG informs the
body manufacturers of important aspects to observe in
all work relating to attachments, bodies, equipment or
modifications.
These body/equipment mounting directives are intended primarily for the professional manufacturers of attachments, bodies, equipment or modifications for our
vehicles. For this reason, these body/equipment
mounting directives assume that the body manufacturer
possesses the necessary background knowledge. If you
intend to install attachments, special-purpose bodies,
equipment or conversions on the vehicle, please be
aware that certain types of work (e.g. welding work on
load-bearing components) may only be carried out by
qualified personnel. This will avoid the risk of injury and
will attain the degree of quality required for the attachments, special-purpose bodies, equipment and conversions.
1.1
The aim of these directives
These directives serve as instructions for the manufacture of assemblies and of attachments, bodywork, equipment or modifications for bodies not manufactured by
Mercedes-Benz. The following body/equipment mounting directives are divided into 9 cross-referenced sections to help you to find information quickly:
1. Introduction
2. General
3. Planning of bodies
4. Technical threshold values for planning
5. Damage prevention
6. Modifications to the basic vehicle
7. Types of bodies
8. Calculations
9. Technical data
Appendix:
Index
i
See the body manufacturer information portal for additional information and technical data ( page 38).
The index features linked cross-references in the PDF
version to help you find information quickly.
The threshold values chosen in Section 4 must be adhered to and must form the basis of planning.
Section 6, entitled "Modifications to the basic vehicle", and Section 7, "Types of bodies", are the main
source of technical information contained in these
body/equipment mounting directives.
1 Introduction
1.1 The aim of these directives
Risk of accident and injury
Before installing any attachments, special-purpose

bodies, equipment or carrying out any modifications
to the basic vehicle and/or its assemblies, you must
read the relevant sections of the vehicle Operating Instructions, as well as the operating and assembly instructions issued by the manufacturer of the
accessories and items of optional equipment.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers and endanger yourself or others.
To ensure operating and road safety of the chassis and

avoid contravention of warranty conditions, pay particular attention to the following information.
Illustrations and schematic drawings are examples and
help explain texts and tables.
References to directives, standards, guidelines, etc., are
in brief form for information only.
More information is available from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
DaimlerChrysler AG
The following graphics show the distinction between the

basic vehicle and the body:
Basic vehicle
Body
1 Introduction
1.2 Symbols
1.2
Symbols
You will find the following symbols used in these directives:
Warning
A warning draws your attention to possible risks of accident and injury to yourself and others.
Environmental note
An environmental note gives you tips on the protection of the environment.
!
This note draws your attention to possible hazards to
your vehicle.
i
This tip contains advice or further information you
may find useful.
page
This symbol indicates the page on which you

will find further information on the subject
and features linked cross-references in the
PDF version.
1 Introduction
1.3 Vehicle safety
1.3
Vehicle safety
The use of non-approved parts, assemblies or conversion parts and accessories can jeopardise the safety
of the vehicle.
Observe the national specifications since the installation of attachments, special-purpose bodies and
equipment, or the performing of conversion work on
the vehicle could change the approved vehicle type
and may therefore invalidate the general operating
permit.

Approval from official test centres or official permits
cannot rule out safety risks.
Notes on vehicle safety
Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you use only parts and assemblies or conversion
parts and accessories that have been recommended by
Mercedes-Benz for the type of vehicle concerned.
Parts that modify the vehicle such that they:
change the vehicle type approved in the general
operating permit
can be expected to endanger road users, or
adversely affect exhaust emissions or noise levels
will invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit in
many countries.
1 Introduction
1.4 Operational safety
1.4
Operational safety
Risk of accident

Work on electronic equipment and its software not
carried out properly could prevent this equipment
from working correctly. Since the electronic systems
are networked, this might also affect systems that
have not been modified.
Malfunctions in the electronic systems could seriously jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle.
1 Introduction
1.5 Accident prevention
1.5
Accident prevention
The equipment fitted during installation, bodywork, assembly or conversion must comply with all applicable
laws and directives and with health and safety and accident prevention regulations, safety regulations and information sheets issued by accident insurers.
All technical means shall be used to avoid operating conditions that may be unsafe or liable to cause an accident.
In Germany, information is provided to commercial carriers by the "Vehicles" Working Group of the "Traffic"
Technical Committee at the following address:
Telephone:
+49 (0) 40 39 80 0
Fax:
+49 (0) 40 39 80-19 99
E-mail:
info@bgf.de
Postal address:
Berufsgenossenschaft fr
Fahrzeughaltungen (German
Trade Association of Vehicle
Owners)
Ottenser Hauptstrae 54
D-22765 Hamburg, Germany
Comply with all national laws, guidelines and vehicle registration regulations.
The manufacturer of the special-purpose bodies,
conversions and of special equipment is responsible for compliance with these laws and regulations.
10
2 General
2.1 Vehicle and model designations
2.1
Vehicle and model designations
These body/equipment mounting directives are valid for

the following vehicle model series (BM):
Vehicle
Actros (BM 93X)
Axor (BM 94X and 95X)
Atego (BM 97X)
Econic
18t
18t
7t
18t
20t
25t
8t
26t
25t
26t
9t
26t
32t
10t
32t
33t
41t
12t
13t
15t
Explanation of truck model designation:

Example
2544
25
44
6x2/4
6x2/4
6
x2
/4
Permissible gross weight in tons (solo vehicle)

Engine output in bhp (* x 10)
Vehicle specification (brief description)
Chassis/platform truck
A
All-wheel-drive
B
Cement mixer
K
Tipper
S
Semitrailer tractor vehicle
L
Pneumatic suspension
Axle designation
Number of wheels or pairs of wheels
Number of driven wheels or pairs of wheels
Number of steered wheels
11
2 General
(BM 93X)
18t
VKB
1,832
1,836
1,841
1,844
1,846
1,850
1,854
1,858
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V6
V6
V8
V8
V8
235 /320
265/ 360
300 /408
320/ 435
335 /456
370/503
395 /537
425/578
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
1,700
1,850
2,050
2,100
2,200
2,400
2,500
2,700
rpm
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
S(F07) short
M(F05) standard
L(F04) long
Mega (F15)
G211-16
G211-16
G211-16
G211-16
G231-16
G240-16
G240-16
G260-16
5,100
5,400
5,700
6,000
3,900
5,700
6,000
4,800
5,400
5,700
5,400
5,700
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm)
4,500
4,800
4,200
4,500
4,800
5,100
5,400
NR
NRA
LS
3,600
3,900
Permissible axle loads and
weights (kg)
Permissible total gross weight

of combination
A.1
71,00
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
Total
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
12
2 General
(BM 93X)
18t
VKB
1,832
1,836
1,841
1,844
1,846
1,850
1,854
1,858
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V6
V6
V8
V8
V8
235 /320
265/ 360
300 /408
320/ 435
335 /456
370/503
395 /537
425/578
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
1,700
1,850
2,050
2,100
2,200
2,400
2,500
2,700
rpm
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
S(F07) short
M(F05) standard
L(F04) long
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
G211-16
G211-16
G211-16
G211-16
G231-16
G240-16
G240-16
G260-16
4,500
3,600
3,900
3,600
3,900
3,600
Mega (F15)
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm)
LS/NR
LSNRA
NRL
3,600
AK
A.1
71,00
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
11,500
Total
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
3,900
weights (kg)

of combination
13
2 General
(BM 93X)
20t
VKB
2,032
2,036
2,041
2,044
2,046
2,050
2,054
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V6
V6
V8
V8
235 /320
265/ 360
300 /408
320/ 435
335 /456
370/503
395 /537
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
1,700
1,850
2,050
2,100
2,200
2,400
2,500
rpm
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
S(F07) short
M(F05) standard
L(F04) long
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
G240-16
G240-16
G240-16
G240-18
4,500
4,800
5,100
3,900
3,600
3,900
3,900
4,500
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm)
3,600
AS
AK

weights (kg)

of combination
A.1
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
A.2
13,000
13,000
13,000
13,000
13,000
13,000
13,000
Total
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
20,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
14
2 General
(BM 93X)
25t
VKB
2,532
2,536
2,541
2,544
2,546
2,550
2,554
2,558
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V6
V6
V8
V8
V8
235 /320
265/ 360
300 /408
320/ 435
335 /456
370/503
395 /537
425/578
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
1,700
1,850
2,050
2,100
2,200
2,400
2,500
2,700
rpm
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
S(F07) short
M(F05) standard
G211-16
G211-16
G211-16
G211-16
G231-16
G240-16
G240-16
G260-16
4,500
4,800
4,200
4,800
5,100
6,000
3,150
3,450
3,750
4,050
4,500
4,800
5,100
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
L(F04) long
Mega (F15)
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm) DNA 6 x 2
L6x2
4,500
6 x 2 /4
NR 6 x 2
LS 6 x 2 /4
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
71,00
A.2
10,000/ 8,000
10,000 /8,000
10,000/ 8,000
10,000 /8,000
10,000/ 8,000
10,000 /80,00
10,000/ 8,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
2,500
weights (kg)
DNA 6 x 2
Total

of combination
L6x2
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500/ 7,100
11,500 /7,100
11,500/ 7,100
11,500 /7,100
11,500/ 7,100
11,500 /7,100
11,500/ 7,100
11,500 /7,100
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
Total
of combination
6 x 2 /4, LS 6 x 2 /4
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
71,00
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
7,100/11,500
7,100 /11,500
7,100/11,500
7,100 /11,500
7,100/11,500
7,100/ 11,500
7,100/11,500
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
Total
of combination
15
2 General
(BM 93X)
26t
VKB
2,632
2,636
2,641
2,644
2,646
2,650
2,654
2,658
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V6
V6
V8
V8
V8
235 /320
265/ 360
300/408
320 /435
335/ 456
370 /503
395/ 537
425/578
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
1,700
1,850
2,050
2,100
2,200
2,400
2,500
2,700
rpm
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
S(F07) short
M(F05) standard
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
G240-16
G240-16
G240-16
G240-16
G260-16
4,200
4,500
5,100
4,200
3,300
3,300
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
L(F04) long
Mega (F15)
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm) 6 x 4
L6x4
4,500
4,800
S6x4
LS 6 x 4
K6x4
3,600
3,900
3,300
3,300
LK 6 x 4
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
Total
26,000
25,000
26,000
25,000
26,000
25,000
26,000
25,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
3,300
weights (kg)

of combination
16
2 General
(BM 93X)
32t
VKB
3,232
3,236
3,241
3,244
3,246
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V6
V6
235 /320
265/ 360
300/408
320 /435
335/ 456
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
1,700
1,850
2,050
2,100
2,200
rpm
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
G240-16
G240-16
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
M(F05) standard
Transmission
5,400
K 8 x 4 /4
A.1
2x7,100
2x7,100
2x7,100
2x7,100
2x7,100
A.2
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
Total
32,000
32,000
32,000
32,000
32,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
4,200
4,500
5,100
8 x 6 /4
4,500
B8x4
4,200
4,500
5,100
K 8 x 8 /4
4,800
weights (kg)

of combination
17
2 General
(BM 93X)
33t
VKB
3,332
3,336
3,341
3,344
3,346
3,350
3,354
3,358
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
OM 502 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V6
V6
V8
V8
V8
235 /320
265/ 360
300/408
320 /435
335/ 456
370 /503
395/ 537
425/578
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
1,700
1,850
2,050
2,100
2,200
2,400
2,500
2,700
rpm
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
M(F05) standard
L(F04) long
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
G240-16
G240-16
G240-16
G240-16
G260-16
4,500
3,300
3,300
3,600
3,900
3,300
3,600
3,900
4,200
4,500
3,600
3,600
3,900
Mega (F15)
Transmission
4,200
S6x4
K6x4
6x6
S6x6
K6x6

weights (kg)
A.1
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
7,500
A.2
2x13,000
2x913,000
2x13,000
2x13,000
2x13,000
2x13,000
2x13,000
2x13,000
33,000
33,000
33,000
33,000
33,000
33,000
33,000
33,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
Total
of combination
18
2 General
(BM 93X)
41t
VKB
4,141
4,144
4,146
4,150
Engine type
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 501 LA
OM 502 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
V6
V6
V6
V8
300 /408
320/ 435
335/456
370 /503
rpm
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,800
Nm
2,050
2,100
2,200
2,400
rpm
1,080
1,80
1,080
1,080
G240-16
G240-16
G240-16
G240-16
5,100
4,500
4,200
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
M(F05) standard
Transmission
5,400
K 8 x 4 /4
4,200
4,500
8 x 6 /4
B8x4
4,500
5,100
K 8 x 8 /4
A.1
2x7,500
2x7,500
2x7,500
2x7,500
A.2
2x13,000
2x13,000
2x13,000
2x13,000
41,000
41,000
41,000
41,000
4,800
weights (kg)
Total
of combination
19
2 General
(BM 94X)
18t
25t
VKB
1,836
1,840
1,843
2,536
2,540
2,543
Engine type
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
6R
6R
6R
6R
6R
6R
260 /354
295/ 401
315/428
260 /354
295/ 401
315 /428
rpm
1,900
1,900
1,900
1,900
1,900
1,900
Nm
1,850
2,000
2,100
1,850
2,000
2,100
rpm
1,100
1,100
1,100
1,100
1,100
1,100
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
G221-9
G221-9
G221-9
G221-9
G221-9
G221-9
3,600
3,900
4,500
4,800
5,100
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm) LS
L6x2

weights (kg)

of combination
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500
11,500
11,500
7,100/11,500
7,100 /11,500
7,100/ 11,500
Total
18,000
18,000
18,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
20
2 General
(BM 94X)
26t
32t
VKB
2,636
2,640
2,643
3,236
3,240
3,243
Engine type
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
OM 457 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
6R
6R
6R
6R
6R
6R
265 /360
295/ 401
315/428
265 /360
295/ 401
315 /428
rpm
1,900
1,900
1,900
1,900
1,900
1,900
Nm
1,850
2,000
2,100
1,850
2,000
2,100
rpm
1,100
1,100
1,100
1,100
1,100
1,100
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
G210-16
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm) K 6 x 4
3,600
3,900
B6x4
3,600
3,900
K8x4
4,200
4,500
5,100
B8x4
4,200
4,500
weights (kg)
Permissible total gross

combination weight (kg)
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
2x7,100
2x7,100
2x7,100
A.2
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
2x9,500
Total
26,000
26,000
26,000
32,000
32,000
32,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
40,000
21
2 General
(BM 95X)
18t
VKB
1,823
1,828
1,833
Engine type
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 926 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
6R
6R
6R
170 /231
205/ 279
240/326
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
810
1,100
1,300
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
G85-6
G100-12
G221-9
Wheelbase (mm)
3,900
4,200
4,500
4,800
5,100
5,400
5,700
6,000
6,300
L
3,900
4,200
4,500
4,800
5,100
5,400
5,700
6,000
6,300
NR
4,800
5,400
5,700
A
4,200
4,500
K
3,600
3,900

weights (kg)

of combination
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500
11,500
11,500
Total
18,000
18,000
18,000
28,000
36,000
36,000
22
2 General
(BM 95X)
18t
VKB
1,823
1,828
1,833
Engine type
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 926 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
6R
6R
6R
170 /231
205/ 279
240/326
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
810
1,100
1,300
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
G85-6
G100-12
G221-9
3,600
3,900
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
AK
LS
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500
11,500
11,500
Total
18,000
18,000
18,000
28,000
36,000
36,000
3600
weights (kg)

of combination
23
2 General
(BM 95X)
25t
26t
VKB
2,523
2,528
2,533
2,628
2,633
Engine type
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 926 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 926 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
6R
6R
6R
6R
6R
170 /231
205/ 279
240/326
205 /279
240/ 326
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
810
1,100
1,300
1,100
1,300
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
G100-12
G100-12
G221-9
G100-12
G221-9
4,200
4,500
4,800
5,100
3,750
4,050
4,500
4,800
4,200
4,500
3,300
3,900
3,300
3,600
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
L 6 x 2 /4
3,150
3,450
L/ NR 6 x 2
6x4
B6x4
K6x4
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
7,100
11,500
11,500
9,500
9,500
A.3
11,500
7,100
7,100
9,500
9,500
Total
25,000
25,000
25,000
2,600
2,600
32,000
36,000
36,000
40,000
40,000
3,900
weights (kg)

of combination
A.1
24
2 General
(BM 97X)
6.5t
7.49t
8.0t
VKB
712
715
812
815
818
815
818
823
Engine type
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
4R
4R
4R
4R
4R
4R
4R
6R
90/122
110/ 150
90/ 122
110 /150
130/ 177
110 /150
130/ 177
170/231
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
470
580
470
580
675
580
675
810
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
G60-6
G60-6
G85-6
G256-6
G60-6
G60-6
G60-6
G60-6
Wheelbase (mm)
3,320
3,620
4,220
3,320
3,620
3,020
4,820
L
3,020
4,220
4,820
A
3,320
3,320
3,020
3,260
K
3,020
KK
AK
3,260
weights (kg)

of combination
A.1
2,900
2,900
3,200
3,200
3,200
3,400
3,400
3,400
A.2
3,800
3,800
4,600
4,600
4,600
5,000
5,000
5,000
Total
6,500
6,500
7,490
7,490
7,490
8,000
8,000
8,000
13,000
13,000
13,000
18,000
18,000
18,000
20,000
20,000
25
2 General
(BM 97X)
9.5t
10.5t
12t m. R.
VKB
915
918
923
1,015
1,018
1,023
1,215
1,218
1,223
Engine type
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
4R
4R
4R
4R
4R
6R
4R
4R
6R
110 /150
130 /177
170/231
110/150
130/ 177
170/ 231
110 /150
130 /177
170/231
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
580
675
810
580
675
810
580
675
810
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
G56-6
G56-6
G85-6
G60-6
G60-6
G85-6
G56-6
G60-6
G85-6
3,020
3,320
3,620
3,560
4,160
3,560
4,160
4,400
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm)
4,220
4,760
4,820
5,360
L
3,020
3,320
3,620
4,220
4,760
4,820
5,360
A
3,020
3,260
A.1
3,800
3,800
3,800
4,300
4,300
4,300
4,400
4,400
A.2
6,200
6,200
6,200
6,700
6,700
6,700
8,100
8,100
8,100
Total
9,500
9,500
9,500
10,500
10,500
10,500
11,990
11,990
11,990
13,000
13,000
22,000
18,000
22,000
24,000
15,500
15,500
15,500
3,020
3,320
weights (kg)

of combination
26
2 General
(BM 97X)
9.5t
10.5t
12t m. R.
VKB
915
918
923
1,015
1,018
1,023
1,215
1,218
1,223
Engine type
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
4R
4R
4R
4R
4R
6R
4R
4R
6R
110 /150
130 /177
170/231
110/150
130/ 177
170/ 231
110 /150
130 /177
170/231
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
580
675
810
580
675
810
580
675
810
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
G56-6
G56-6
G85-6
G60-6
G60-6
G85-6
G56-6
G60-6
G85-6
A.1
3,800
3,800
3,800
4,300
4,300
4,300
4,400
4,400
4,400
A.2
6,200
6,200
6,200
6,700
6,700
6,700
8,100
8,100
8,100
Total
9,500
9,500
9,500
10,500
10,500
10,500
11,990
11,990
11,990
13,000
13,000
22,000
18,000
22,000
24,000
15,500
15,500
15,500
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
KK
3,320
AK
3,260
weights (kg)

of combination
27
2 General
(BM 97X)
12t
13.5t
VKB
1,215
1,218
1,223
1,228
1,318
1,323
1,328
Engine type
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
4R
4R
6R
6R
4R
6R
6R
110 /150
130/ 177
170/231
205 /279
130/ 177
170 /231
205/ 279
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
580
675
810
1,100
675
810
1,100
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
S(F07) short
M(F20) standard
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
G56-6
G60-6
G85-6
G131-9
G60-6
G85-6
G131-9
5,360
5,960
6,260
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm)
3,560
4,160
4,760
L
3,560
4,160
4,760
5,360
3,260
3,560
3,260
KK
3,560
AK
A.1
4,400
4,400
4,400
4,400
5,000
5,000
A.2
8,100
8,100
8,100
8,100
9,000
9,000
9,000
Total
11,900
11,900
11,900
11,900
13,500
13,500
13,500
15,500
22,000
24,000
28,000
22,000
22,000
28,000
3,260
weights (kg)

of combination
5,000
28
2 General
(BM 97X)
12t
13.5t
VKB
1,215
1,218
1,223
1,228
1,318
1,323
1,328
Engine type
OM 904 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
4R
4R
6R
6R
4R
6R
6R
110 /150
130/ 177
170/231
205 /279
130/ 177
170 /231
205/ 279
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
580
675
810
1,100
675
810
1,100
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
S(F07) short
M(F20) standard
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
G56-6
G60-6
G85-6
G131-9
G60-6
G85-6
G131-9
3260
3560
5,000
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
LS

weights (kg)

of combination
A.1
4,400
4,400
4,400
4,400
5,000
5,000
A.2
8,100
8,100
8,100
8,100
9,000
9,000
9,000
Total
11,900
11,900
11,900
11,900
13,500
13,500
13,500
15,500
22,000
24,000
28,000
22,000
22,000
28,000
29
2 General
(BM 97X)
15t
VKB
1,518
1,523
1,528
Engine type
OM 904 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
4R
6R
6R
130 /177
170/ 231
205/279
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
675
810
1,100
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
S(F07) short
G60-6
G85-6
G100-12
3,560
3,260
M(F20) standard
L(F04) long
F04+DD5
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm)
3,560
4,160
4,760
5,360
5,960
6,260
L
3,560
4,160
4,760
5,360
3,260
A
KK
3,560
AK
3,260
LS
3,260
3,560
weights (kg)

of combination
A.1
5,100
5,100
5,100
A.2
10,500
10,500
10,500
Total
15,000
15,000
15,000
22,000
28,000
34,000
30
2 General
(BM 957)
18t
26t
VKB
1823
1828
1833
2628
2633
Engine type
OM 906 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 926 LA
OM 906 LA
OM 926 LA
Number of cylinders
Output
6R
6R
6R
6R
6R
170 /231
205/ 279
240/326
205 /279
240/ 326
rpm
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
2,200
Nm
810
1,100
1,300
1,100
1,300
rpm
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
1,200 1,600
kW/ bhp
Maximum torque
Cab
FH7
FH8
MD 3,060
MD 3,060
MD 3,066
MD 3,060
MD 3,066
3,900
4,200
4,500
3,900
4,200
4,500
4,800
3,150
3,450
3,900
4,200
3,900
4,200
Transmission
Wheelbase (mm) DNA 4 x 2
L/NLA 6 x 2 /4
L/VLA 6 x 2 /4
LL 6 x 4

weights (kg) LL 4 x 2
A.1
7,100
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500
11,500
11,500
Total
18,000
18,000
18,000
36,000
36,000

of combination
weights (kg) L/NLA 6 x 2 /4
A.1
7,100
7,100
A.2
11,500/ 7,100
11,500/7,100
A.3
25,700
25,700
36,000
36,000

of combination
weights (kg) L/VLA 6 x 2/ 4
A.1
7,100
7,100
A.2
7,100/11,500
7,100 /11,500
A.3
25,700
25,700
36,000
36,000

of combination
weights (kg) LL 6 x 4
A.1
7,500
7,500
A.2
9,500 /9,500
9,500/ 9,500
A.3
26,000
26,000
36,000
36,000

of combination
31
2 General
Legend
VKB
Sales designation
Standard
Available
Example of transmission designation

G 211-16
G = Transmission
211 = Maximum input torque (x10 in Nm)
16 = Number of gear speeds
All-wheel-drive platform truck
AK
All-wheel-drive tipper vehicle
AS
All-wheel-drive semitrailer tractor vehicle
Cement mixer vehicle
Tipper vehicle
Air-sprung platform truck
LK
Air-sprung tipping vehicle
LS
Air-sprung semitrailer tractor vehicle
LL
Fully air-sprung vehicle
LS/NR
Air-sprung semitrailer tractor vehicle/low frame
KK
Crane-tipper vehicle
NR
Low frame
NRA
Low frame/Car transporter
NRL
Low frame/Lowliner
DNA
Twin-tyred trailing axle
NLA
Trailing axle
VLA
Leading axle
A.1
1st axle
A.2
2nd axle
A.3
3rd axle
Total
Total
Wheel formulae
4x2
Two-axle vehicle with driven rear axle
4x4
Two-axle vehicle with all-wheel-drive
6x4
Three-axle vehicle with two driven rear axles
6x6
Three-axle vehicle with all-wheel-drive
6 x 2 DNA
3-axle vehicle with driven rear axle and a twin-tyred trailing axle
6 x 2 NLA
Rear axle and second rear axle as rigid trailing axle
6 x 2 /4 NLA
3-axle vehicle with a driven rear axle and a second rear axle as steered trailing axle
6 x 2 /4 VLA
3-axle vehicle with a driven rear axle and a second rear axle
6 x 2 /2 VLA
3-axle vehicle with a driven rear axle and a second rear axle
8 x 4 /4
4-axle vehicle with two driven rear axles and two steered front axles
8 x 6 /4
4-axle vehicle with two driven rear axles and two steered front axles, of which the first front axle is driven
8 x 8 /4
4-axle vehicle with all-wheel-drive and two steered front axles
32
2 General
2.2 Technical advice and contacts
2.2
Technical advice and contacts
The staff members of the TPC/MVC department, the

team responsible for conversion/body manufacturers
and the body/equipment mounting directives for the
overall vehicle development of Mercedes-Benz trucks,
issue certificates of endorsement for the Mercedes-Benz
Telephone:
Fax:
Postal
address:
0711-17-5 82 11
0711-17-5 44 15
0711-17-5 84 25
0711-17-5 17 19
0711-17-5 21 91
DaimlerChrysler AG
Actros, Axor, Atego and Econic series and answer technical and design-engineering questions regarding vehicle registration and product liability. The relevant
members of staff can be contacted on:
Atego (BM 97X)

Fire brigade (all trucks)
Actros (BM 93X), Axor (BM 94X and 95X)
Econic
Team management and basic questions on all series
HPC (Hauspostcode) C 108

Abteilung TPC/MVH
D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany
If you have questions, suggestions or criticisms regarding these body/equipment mounting directives, you can contact
the Conversions & Body Manufacturers team; Body/Equipment Mounting Directives, at the e-mail address shown on our
website:
http:// abh-infoportal.mercedes-benz.com
http:// bb-infoportal.mercedes-benz.com
33
2 General
2.3 Issuing certificates of endorsement
2.3
Issuing certificates of endorsement
2.3.1
Certificate of endorsement
DaimlerChrysler AG does not issue body/equipment approval certificates for bodies not manufactured by
Mercedes-Benz. It only provides body manufacturers
with important information and technical guidelines for
the correct handling of the product by means of these directives. DaimlerChrysler AG therefore recommends
that all work on the basic vehicle and body is carried out
in accordance with these Mercedes-Benz body/
equipment mounting directives.
to ensure the operating safety, road safety and handling

characteristics of the entire vehicle it has manufactured.
It is thus the sole responsibility of the body manufacturer
to ensure the compatibility of the body, equipment, fittings or conversions with the basic vehicle, as well as to
guarantee the operating and road safety of the entire vehicle.
Comply with all national laws, guidelines and vehicle registration regulations.
DaimlerChrysler AG advises against bodies and equipment, fittings and conversions which:
are not manufactured in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives
exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight
would exceed the permissible axle loads
DaimlerChrysler AG issues certificates of endorsement
on a discretionary basis, based on the following requirements:
DaimlerChrysler AG bases its evaluation exclusively on
the documents submitted by the body manufacturer carrying out the conversion. It inspects and declares safe
only the explicitly described scopes and their general
compatibility with the chassis specified and its connection points or, in the case of chassis modifications, the
basic constructional permissibility for the specified
chassis. The certificate of endorsement does not apply
to the design of the bodywork as a whole, nor to its functions or intended use. The endorsement is only applicable if the design, production and installation carried out
by the body manufacturer is effected to the state of the
art and in accordance with the applicable
Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives
unless deviations have been endorsed in these directives. The certificate of endorsement does not absolve
the body manufacturer carrying out the modifications
from product liability or the obligation to carry out its
own calculations, checks and tests of the entire vehicle
34
2 General
2.3 Issuing certificates of endorsement
2.3.2
Documents required
In particular cases, the body drawings may be presented

to the responsible department before the work is commenced ( page 33). The drawings must contain the following information:
All deviations from the Mercedes-Benz body/
equipment mounting directives
Complete data on dimensions, weights and centre of
gravity (weight certificates)
Body mounting to the vehicle
Conditions of vehicle operation, e.g.
on poor roads
in very dusty conditions
at high altitude
at extremely high or low ambient temperatures
Certification (e-mark, seat tensile strength test, etc.)
Submitting the required documentation in full will make
queries on our part unnecessary and will speed up
processing.
2.3.3
Legal claim
No legal claim to the issue of a certificate of endorsement can be made.

DaimlerChrysler AG reserves the right to refuse to
grant a certificate of endorsement if ongoing technical development and the knowledge gained from it
render such a refusal necessary, even if a similar certificate was granted in the past.
The certificate of endorsement may be limited to single vehicles.
The retroactive granting of a certificate of endorsement for vehicles already completed or delivered can
be refused.
The body manufacturer alone is responsible for:
the functionality and compatibility of the body and
its equipment, fittings and conversion with the basic
vehicle
operating and road safety
all attachments, bodies, equipment or modifications
and fitted parts.
If complex calculations and/or vehicle tests are required for the endorsement, the resulting costs must be
borne by the company carrying out the conversion or
manufacturing the body, or by this company's customer.
The relevant department of Mercedes-Benz Truck Development will determine the scope of the testing required
( page 33).
35
2 General
2.4 Product liability
2.4
Product liability
Legal product liability is the liability of a manufacturer for

any consequential damage arising to the user of the
product or a third party and caused by the product not
possessing the degree of operating safety which the injured party can reasonably expect.
With regard to product liability, attention is drawn to the
following points:
Each manufacturer is liable for the products it manufactures. As manufacturer of Mercedes-Benz vehicles,
DaimlerChrysler AG is accordingly only liable for its own
designs and products.
DaimlerChrysler AG does not therefore accept any liability for damage resulting from defects in retrofitted products produced by third-party manufacturers.
The vehicle body manufacturer/modifier shall bear sole
responsibility for:
the operating and road safety of the body
the operating and road safety of parts and conversion parts
testing and maintaining the operating and road safety of the entire vehicle after assembly (handling,
braking and steering characteristics must not be adversely affected by assembly)
the effects of parts or conversion parts on the chassis
consequential damage resulting from the attachment, special-purpose body, installation or conversion
operating safety and freedom of movement of all

moving parts of the chassis after the bodywork conversion (e.g. axles, springs, propeller shafts, steering, transmission linkage, etc.) even in the case of
diagonal torsion with respect to the add-on equipment.
Work carried out on or modifications made to the chassis or bodywork must be entered in the "Confirmations
by the body manufacturer" section of the Maintenance
Booklet.
2.4.1
Ensuring traceability
Dangers caused by your equipment/attachment, and

which are not detected until after delivery may require
action in the country of delivery (customer information,
warning, recall). In order for such measures to be as effective as possible, it must be ensured that the
equipment/attachment produced by you can be traced
after delivery.
In order to ensure the above, and in order to be able to
use the Central Vehicle Register (ZFZR) of the German
Federal Bureau of Motor Vehicles and Drivers or similar
offices in other countries to determine the owners concerned, we strongly recommend that you record the serial number/identification number of your equipment/
attachment together with the associated vehicle identification number in your databases. To this end, it is also
advisable to store the addresses of your customers and
to make provisions for subsequent purchasers to be able
to register.
consequential damage resulting from retrofitted

electrical and electronic systems
36
2 General
2.5 Warranty claims
2.5
Warranty claims
Warranty claims can only be made within the framework

of the contract of sale between purchaser and seller.
This means that each seller is liable to the purchaser for
the items supplied by the former to the latter.
In the following cases in particular, DaimlerChrysler AG
will assume no liability:
if the vehicle used does not correspond to the equipment version for the country in question and field of
operation
for damage caused by the body itself or the manner
in which it is mounted.
37
2 General
2.6 Body manufacturer information portal
2.6
Body manufacturer information portal
The Mercedes-Benz body manufacturer information portal is the central communications platform between
Mercedes-Benz and you, our body manufacturer partners.
It is only your chassis adaptations, attachments, add-on
equipment and modifications that make a commercial
vehicle suitable for customers out of our Mercedes-Benz
chassis. We have a common interest in making the quality of the entire vehicle as high as possible. We will only
reach this goal if we communicate as partners, exchange
information quickly and openly, and share our expertise.
We use the Mercedes-Benz information portal to provide
you with technical information and vehicle data. You can
also use it to communicate with our experts. In return,
you as a body manufacturer can introduce your company, contact persons and products to the sales organisation and the Mercedes-Benz body manufacturer support
service.
Next we will introduce individual modules of the portal in
more detail. Take advantage of the opportunities offered
by the Mercedes-Benz body manufacturer information
portals!
2.6.1
Your company profile (ABH profile and

the Qualified Partner List (QPL)
You will have to register as a body manufacturer on your

first visit; this will make all the information on the portal
available to you. Simply enter your company name, contact details, user profile and contact person in four
steps.
Qualified Partners of Mercedes-Benz Commercial Vehicles have many additional advantages and sales opportunities. To become a QPL, you will have to take a
second step and provide more detailed information in
the QPL process; you can also initiate this process at a
later date, independent of the registration process.
Based on this information about yourself, a competent
team of experts at Mercedes-Benz will assess your company; the assessment will be based on quality, sales and
service criteria.
You can update your user and company profile at any
time in the body manufacturer information portal, under
the "My Portal" menu item. You can also subscribe to the
"body manufacturer information bulletin", our e-mail
newsletter on Mercedes-Benz Commercial Vehicle issues affecting body manufacturers.
http:// abh-infoportal.mercedes-benz.com
http:// bb-infoportal.mercedes-benz.com
38
2 General
2.6 Body manufacturer information portal
2.6.2
MBAS Web (Mercedes-Benz body/

equipment manufacturer system) and
order data
The MBAS Web area will help you select a vehicle suitable for your customer from more than 10,000 lorry chassis and vehicle versions. Clearly structured filters let you
choose your vehicle with a few mouse clicks. Once you
have selected a vehicle, all relevant technical data and
information are provided.
Available online in the MBAS Web:
True-to-scale CAD drawings in DXF or PDF format,
with approximately 100 dimension specifications
Configurator for individual tender drawings with the
most important combinations of optional equipment
(tank, exhaust, air intake, cab and back frame overhang) in PDF and DXF formats
Simplified rough tender drawings (vignettes) in four
views (side view, top view, back and front view) containing the most important main measurements in
DXF format
Technical data sheets, engine diagrams, optional
equipment weights
Body/equipment mounting directives for lorries and
transporters in up to 11 languages
In "My portal" "My order data" you can call up the delivery date, the automatically generated chassis drawing
and the vehicle configuration for an order by using the
Mercedes-Benz order data.
2.6.3
Partnership and contact options
Short direct paths are an important factor in successful

collaboration. This is why our portal offers several ways
to contact us:
Our body manufacturer information portal has an integrated mail response system, which has a contact form
you can use at any time to send enquiries to us. The system ensures that your questions are forwarded to the
right contact, who then answers them quickly and competently.
Our contact persons database enables you to find a contact at our company from whichever area of expertise is
required, and to contact that person by telephone, email or post.
There is also a hotline that can answer questions about
the portal:
Telephone: +49-(0)711-17-33322
E-mail: abh-infoportal@daimlerchrysler.com
bb-infoportal@daimlerchrysler.com
Body/equipment mounting directive archive for all

lorry series since 1995
Power take-off drawing in installation position in PDF
and DXF formats
Equipment of Mercedes-Benz commercial vehicles:
code, short descriptions and technical details of the
complete host of equipment (incl. CTT host)
Body/equipment manufacturer information: archive
for newsletters on changes made to Mercedes-Benz
CV that are relevant to body/equipment manufacturers
Catalogue of electronic and mechanical interface
parts for Mercedes-Benz CV
39
2 General
2.7 Workshop Information System (WIS)
2.7
Workshop Information System (WIS)
The Workshop Information System (WIS) is available to

you as an additional source of information. The WIS includes information on basic data (dimensions, tightening
torques), function descriptions, circuit diagrams, repair
instructions and maintenance sheets.
Information about the WIS can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or from:
Telephone:
+49 (0)711-17-83170
Fax:
+49 (0)711-17- 40082
Postal address:
DaimlerChrysler AG
HPC (Hauspostcode) R800
Abteilung GSP/TIM,
D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany
40
2 General
2.8 Mercedes star and logo
2.8
Mercedes star and logo
The Mercedes star and Mercedes-Benz logo are trademarks of DaimlerChrysler AG.
They may not be removed or attached to another point
without approval.
Mercedes-Benz stars and Mercedes-Benz logos supplied
separately must be attached at the points specified by
Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicle rear end positions
The Mercedes-Benz logo must be attached on the rear of
the vehicle at the bottom right when viewed in the direction of travel.
Appearance of the entire vehicle
If the vehicle fails to comply with the vehicle image and
the quality standards required by Mercedes-Benz, the
trademarks such as the Mercedes star and the
Mercedes-Benz emblem must be removed.
Third-party trademarks
may not be affixed next to Mercedes-Benz trademarks
may only be affixed to other points on the vehicle
with permission from the relevant department of
DaimlerChrysler AG ( page 33)
41
2 General
2.9 Reprocessing components recycling
2.9
Reprocessing components recycling
Environmental note
When planning attachments, bodies, equipment and

modifications, the following principles for environmentally-compatible design and material selection
shall be taken into account, in particular with regard
to EU Directive 2000/53 /EC.
It must be ensured that service products can be removed simply and in an environmentally-compatible
manner by means of drain plugs, etc.
Painting and coating components are to be avoided
wherever possible; coloured plastic parts should be
used instead.
Components in areas at risk from accidents must be
designed in such a way that they are damage-tolerant, repairable and easy to replace.
All plastic parts are to be marked in accordance with
VDA code of practice 260, e.g. "PP GF30R".
i
Additional information is provided in the "Commercial
vehicle recycling, ecology and economy" brochure,
Order no. 6702 6187 00-00/0952 ( page 38).
EU Directive 2000 /53/EC must be complied with.
Materials with risk potential, such as halogen additives,

heavy metals, asbestos, CFCs and CHCs are to be avoided.
It is preferable to use materials which permit recycling and closed material cycles.
Materials and production processes that generate
only low quantities of waste during production must
be selected such that this waste can be easily recycled.
Plastics are to be used only where they provide advantages in terms of cost, function or weight.
In the case of plastics, and composite materials in
particular, only compatible substances within one
material family are to be used.
For components which are relevant to recycling, the
number of different types of plastics used must be
kept to a minimum.
It must be assessed whether a component can be
made from recycled material or admits the addition
of recycled components.
Ensure that all recyclable components can be easily
dismantled for recycling purposes, e.g. using snap
connections, pre-weakened points, that they are
easily accessible, and that their dismantling only requires the use of standard tools.
42
2 General
2.10 Quality assurance system
2.10
Quality assurance system
Worldwide competition, increasingly stringent quality requirements of the entire product by customers, national
and international product liability laws, new forms of organisation and increasing cost pressures require effective quality assurance systems in all areas of the
automotive industry.
To be able to meet these requirements, a working group
of the VDA (Association of German Automobile Manufacturers) has developed a "Guide to quality assurance for
the manufacturers of trailers, bodies and containers" as
VDA volume 8, based on DIN EN ISO 9000 ff.
For the above reasons, DaimlerChrysler AG strongly recommends that body manufacturers set up a quality management system with the following minimum
requirements:
Does the quality management system clearly determine responsibility and authority?
Is there a description of processes/workflows?
Are the contracts checked/is the feasibility of construction checked?
Are product checks on the basis of specified instructions carried out?
What provisions are made for the handling of faulty
products?
Are the inspection results documented and archived?
Do all employees concerned have currently valid
proof of the qualification required?
Is the test equipment systematically monitored?
Is there a system for labelling materials/parts?
Are quality assurance measures carried out at suppliers?
43
3 Planning of bodies
3.1 Selecting the chassis
3.1
Selecting the chassis
!
When planning attachments, bodies, equipment or
modification work, the selected vehicle must be
checked to verify whether it fulfils the necessary requirements.
As well as selecting the correct vehicle version, the necessary standard and optional equipment in particular,
such as:
wheelbase
engine/transmission
power take-off
axle ratio
In order to ensure safe operation of the vehicle it is essential to choose the chassis and its equipment carefully
in accordance with the intended use.
Mercedes-Benz provides special vehicle versions and
wheelbases for different areas of operation.
position of the centre of gravity

legal registration specifications
(e.g. underride guard)
permissible and technical gross vehicle weight
All-wheel-drive platform truck
AF
All-wheel-drive fire engine
AK
All-wheel-drive tipper vehicle
AS
All-wheel-drive semitrailer tractor vehicle
Cement mixer vehicle
Fire engine
Tipper vehicle
Air-sprung platform truck
LK
Air-sprung tipper vehicle
If a certain vehicle version is not listed this may mean

it is not suitable for the intended purpose.
LS
Air-sprung semitrailer tractor vehicle
LS/NR
frame
Air-sprung semitrailer tractor vehicle, low
see the Internet at the following address:

http://bb-infoportal.mercedes-benz.com
KK
Crane/tipper vehicle
see Section 2 "Vehicle and model designations"

( page 11) or
NR
Low frame
contact the department responsible ( page 33)
NRA
Low frame, car transporter
NRL
Low frame, Lowliner
Observe the weight code. An axle designation or its

load-bearing capacity specification only has limited
significance for the gross vehicle weight.
should be taken into consideration when planning and
be adequate for the intended use.
For more information on the chassis and body variants available:
44
3.2 Vehicle modifications
3.2
Vehicle modifications
Risk of accident
Do not make any modifications to assemblies (steering, brake systems, etc.). Modifications to the steering or brake systems could result in these systems no
longer functioning correctly and failing. The driver
could lose control of the vehicle as a result and cause
an accident.
Modifications to the basic vehicle are only permitted
within the scopes defined in these body/equipment
mounting directives.
All vehicles delivered from the factory comply with EC directives and national regulations (except for some vehicles for non-European countries).
The vehicles must still comply with EC directives or national regulations after modifications have been carried
out.
At the time of vehicle approval, the body manufacturer
must inform the officially recognised technical expert or
inspector of any modifications to the chassis. Submit a
certificate of endorsement from DaimlerChrysler AG
(e.g. drawing marked as approved) or the applicable
body/equipment mounting directive if required.
Whenever any kind of work on the brake system is carried out, i.e. even if the work only consists of the removal
of parts, a full check (operation, effectiveness and visual)
of the entire brake system must be carried out.
45
3.3 Dimensions, weights and total vehicle height
3.3
Dimensions, weights and total vehicle

height
Risk of accident
The tyre load-bearing capacity of the vehicle must not

be exceeded by overloading the vehicle above the
specified gross vehicle weight. The tyres could overheat and be damaged. You could thus lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident, injuring yourself or
others.
Data about the permissible axle loads can be found on
the vehicle identification plate.
3.3.1
Observing the permissible total vehicle

height (large volume transporters)
On vehicles with a low frame height and pneumatic suspension (large volume transporters), it is possible to set
a raised driving position to improve ride comfort. This is
indicated by an appropriate display on the instrument
panel.
Observe the permissible total vehicle height and maximum headroom information.
Take legal regulations regarding the permissible vehicle height into consideration when planning bodies. In
the Federal Republic of Germany, the permissible vehicle height is restricted to 4 m. For operation in other
countries, the national legislation of the countries
concerned must be observed (also when the vehicle is
used for international transport). Observe the Operating Instructions.
Dimensions and weights are specified in the tender
drawings and Technical data. These are based on the
standard vehicle equipment. Observe the weight tolerances of +5 % in manufacture (in the Federal Republic of
Germany, in accordance with DIN 70020).
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and gross vehicle weights listed in the Technical data.
For the technical data, see the vehicle documents, the
vehicle identification plate or the code descriptions
(codes for weights start with T) of the order data.
i
Information about changes in weight is available from
the department responsible ( page 33).
46
3.4 Tyres
3.4
Tyres
Risk of accident
On vehicles with a Telligent brake system (BS), the

brake system parameters must be reconfigured if the
tyre size is changed. The vehicle's braking and handling characteristics could otherwise be affected.
The body/equipment manufacturer must ensure that:
the largest permissible tyres can be fitted
the distance between the tyre and the mudguard or
wheel housing is sufficient even when snow or antiskid chains are fitted, with the suspension fully compressed (including any twist) (in accordance with the
applicable regulations)
specifications in the tender drawings are observed
If the option of fitting snow and anti-skid chains cannot
be guaranteed, the operator should be informed by the
body manufacturer (Operating Instructions).
i
You can obtain tender drawings and technical data
from the Mercedes-Benz body/equipment manufacturer system MB-AS) ( page 38).
47
3.5 Bolted and welded connections
3.5
Bolted and welded connections
Risk of accident
3.5.1
All bolt connections relevant to safety, e.g. for wheel

location, steering and braking functions, must not be
altered.
If bolted connections need to be loosened, make sure
that bolted connections of the same characteristics
as the original ones are established once again after
completion of work.
Welding work on the chassis/bodywork may only be
carried out by qualified personnel.
The assemblies fitted during installation, bodywork,
assembly or conversion must comply with all applicable laws and directives, with the rules for accident
prevention and occupational health and safety as well
as the safety rules and bulletins issued by accident insurers.
Bolted connections
If it is necessary to replace standard bolts with longer

bolts, only bolts
of the same diameter
of the same strength grade
of the same type
with the same thread pitch must be used.
VDI guideline 2862 must be applied to all installation
work.
A shortening of the free length of the clamping bolts,
a substitution with stretch-shank bolts or the use of
bolts with a shorter thread will definitely not be approved.
If bolts have been tightened to a specific torque and
angle by Mercedes-Benz, a design modification will
not be possible.
The settling characteristics of bolted connections
must be taken into account.
Additional tensioned parts must be of equal or greater
strength than the preceding tensioned assembly.
i
For further information on bolted and welded connections, see Section 5 "Damage prevention"
( page 85) and Section 6 "Modifications to the basic vehicle" ( page 100) and the Mercedes-Benz
workshop information system (WIS) ( page 40).
The use of Mercedes-Benz tightening torques assumes

coefficients of friction for the bolts within the tolerance
range [=0.08 0.14].
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
Mercedes-Benz standard parts.
48
Flange head bolts
Description of the flange head bolts
The use of flange head bolts means that the bolted connections on the chassis of Mercedes-Benz commercial
vehicles are maintenance-free, i.e. it is not necessary to
retighten the bolts as part of the regular maintenance.
For any work on Mercedes-Benz vehicles we expect bolted connections which meet the same standards.
The main feature of this type of bolt is a pressed-on

flange, which provides an increased head contact area.
Coming bolted connections coming loose

Bolted connections come loose if a permanent change in
length along the axis of the bolt occurs. This results in a
reduction of the pretensioning force and therefore a reduction in the remaining clamping force under working
loads. A permanent change in length can be caused by:
Settling:
Parts (e.g. nuts, washers) which are in contact with each
other and whose surfaces have been treated with anticorrosion protection are subject to settling due to the
pretensioning force.
This means that the more surfaces are bolted together
with one bolt, the greater the change in length due to
settling will be.
Creeping:
The pressure on the surfaces of bolts and nuts exceeds
the specific compressive strength of the materials in the
tensioned parts.
Characteristics
Flange head bolts and nuts in accordance with
Mercedes-Benz standards (MBN) 10105 and 13023 reduce the risk of prestress force losses on the surfaces
due to settling. The surface pressure generated under
this type of bolt head by tightening is much lower than
with other designs because the force is spread over a
larger area.
49
Advantages of flange head screws and nuts in accordance with MBN 10105 and 13023
Reduction of the risk of creeping due to increased surface area and therefore lower pressure compared to
other head designs.
Reduction of settling due to reduced number of parts
to be connected compared to bolted connections with
washers.
The pressed-on concave supporting disc increases
the elasticity of the connection so that the expected settling and creeping can be balanced out and a reduction
in the pretensioning force can be largely avoided.
The elasticity of the bolted connection can also be increased by selecting a large grip length ratio l/d
(l = length of the shaft, d = diameter of the shaft).
The use of flange head bolts and nuts ensures a secure and maintenance-free bolted connection.
(However, the maintenance guidelines of the component
manufacturer must be observed for add-on components,
e.g. semitrailer couplings.)
Compliance with the correct length of clamping

bolts and depth the bolts are screwed into blind
holes must be ensured.
Because nuts in accordance with MBN 13 023 have
a self-locking feature, they must not be used more
than once.
When flange head bolts and nuts are used, the tightening torques listed in the following tables must be applied.
Extract from MBN 10130 Part 3 Category II
Tightening torque tolerance: 3 % to 8 %
Torque power screwdriver; torque wrench: 5 %
Thread
Tightening
torque (Nm)
Prestress force
Fvmin. (kN)
M 8x1.25
29.5 2.3
16.3
M 10x1.5
58 4.5
25.9
M 12x1.5
106 8
39.7
M 14x1.5
172 13
56.0
M 16x1.5
260 20
74.4
M 18x1.5
380 30
96.9
M 20x1.5
520 40
120
50
Extract from MBN 10130 Part 3 Category III
Use of bolted connections
Tightening torque tolerance: 8 % to 20 %
All bolts and nuts which connect attached or mounted

parts to the Mercedes-Benz chassis (e.g. fuel tank, exhaust system, equipment carrier, end cross member)
must be selected in accordance with the criteria described in the "Flange head bolts" section (in accordance
with MBN 10105 and 13023).
Pulse screwdriver; "good" impact wrench: 20 %

Thread
Tightening
torque (Nm)
Prestress force
Fvmin. (kN)
M 8x1.25
26 5
12.9
M 10x1.5
51 10
20.5
M 12x1.5
92 18
31.0
M 14x1.5
150 30
43.9
M 16x1.5
225 45
57.9
M 18x1.5
330 60
75.8
Environmental note
M 20x1.5
460 90
95.6
As of 01 July 2007, the surface protection (9440.40)

must no longer contain chromium 6.
The exception to this are the actual body mountings.

Bolts in accordance with ISO 4162 and ISO 1665 (each
with full shaft design) and nuts in accordance with ISO
7044 with strength category 10.9 can be used in conjunction with surface protection in accordance with VDA
235 102.40 or sealing top paint coat.
On some vehicles, huck-spin fasteners are used on the

spring brackets and on the centre bearing. These can
only be replaced using the appropriate tools. If such
tools are not available, the huck-spin bolts can also be
replaced by bolts (14 mm huck-spin bolts by M16 thread
bolts, 16 mm huck-spin bolts by M18 thread bolts). Use
flange head bolts on the spring brackets or, in the area
of the centre bearing, self-locking bolts.
51
3.5.2
Welded connections

carried out by qualified personnel.
!
Do not perform welding work on:
assemblies, such as the engine, transmission, axles, etc.
the chassis frame (except for modifications to the
wheelbase and frame)
i
For further information on bolted and welded connections, see Section 5 "Damage prevention"
( page 85) and Section 6 "Modifications to the basic vehicle" ( page 100) and the Mercedes-Benz
workshop information system (WIS) ( page 40).
52
3.6 Noise insulation
3.6
Noise insulation
If modifications are carried out on any parts whose operation produces noise, e.g.:
engine
exhaust system
air intake system
tyres, etc.
sound level measurements must be made.
In order not to affect the noise level of the vehicle when
modifications are made, it must be ensured that noise
levels in the vehicle interior are kept to a minimum when
planning bodies.
Noise-insulating parts fitted as standard must not be
removed or modified.
The level of interior noise must not be adversely affected.
i
Country-specific instructions and guidelines must be
observed.
In the Federal Republic of Germany, the EC
Directive 70/157/EEC or Section 49.3 of the German road traffic licensing regulations (low-noise)
(StVZO) must be observed.
53
3.7 Exhaust system
3.7
Exhaust system
Bending radii
!
The original exhaust system mounting must not be
modified. Modifications could damage the exhaust
system.
3.7.1
Euro 3
In the event of modifications to the exhaust system,

only use parts that have been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz for the type of vehicle concerned,
or recommended conversion parts and accessories.
The length and mounting position of the flexible metal hose between the exhaust manifold and exhaust
pipe must not be modified.
The free cross-section of the exhaust pipe downstream of the silencer must not be reduced.
The minimum distance to be maintained to plastic
lines, electric cables and spare wheels:
200 mm for exhaust systems without shielding
80 mm with sheet metal shielding
40 mm with sheet metal shielding and additional
insulation
If it is not possible to maintain these distances, then
instead of plastic lines, use must tombac tubing according to DIN 1755, material CuZn 20 F 33, with the
same interior diameter.
Pipe bend, maximum 90
Additional shielding is required:
Use additional pipe bends if required
in the vicinity of the control units.
Bending radius > 2.5 d
in the vicinity of assemblies, equipment and fittings, if they are not made from heat-resistance
material.
54
3.7 Exhaust system
3.7.2
Euro 4/Euro 5
Environmental note
If carried out incorrectly, modifications to the exhaust

system upstream of the catalytic converter may result
in untreated exhaust emissions being released into
the environment because of deficient gas-tightness.
BlueTec, an exhaust gas treatment based on Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR), is the system used to enable
compliance with the Euro 4/Euro 5 exhaust emissions
standard. BlueTec diesel technology reduces the nitrogen oxide content of the exhaust gases by adding
AdBlue (urea in aqueous solution). The AdBlue is sprayed
into the hot exhaust gases from a metering valve. In the
rear silencer (with the SCR catalytic converter) the exhaust gases react with AdBlue and are thus converted.
This technology requires components which occupy installation space in the vehicle.
AdBlue supply:
AdBlue is supplied from a heated tank located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle. AdBlue is fed via a heated
line to the regulating and metering unit in the throttle
valve area.
A range of tank variants are available for carrying
AdBlue. A special tank filler neck of reduced diameter
protects against mistaken filling of the AdBlue tank with
diesel fuel. The AdBlue tank is located behind the right
mudguard when viewed in the direction of travel. The
size of the tank is dependent on the vehicle and equipment, e.g. size of fuel tank.
Rear silencer with integrated catalytic converter:
The catalytic converter volume required depends on the
vehicle engine type. The size of the rear silencer affects
the installation space available on the left-hand side of
the vehicle.
55
3.7 Exhaust system
Options for moving the AdBlue tank
It is permitted to move the AdBlue tank as long as the instructions in this section are observed.
Unplug the drained AdBlue and hot water lines from
the AdBlue tank (this becomes the interface for the
extension; see instructions for extending the AdBlue
line).
Detach the AdBlue tank and all its fastening components from the vehicle frame.
Fit the AdBlue tank in its new position on the longitudinal frame member of the vehicle. Use the existing tank supports.
The load must be applied to a large area of the chassis frame. It is recommended that existing reinforcements such as frame inserts and crossbars are used;
if not, pressure distribution plates or reinforcing
brackets must be provided. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use material E 500 TM (at least
St 52).
Do not attach in the middle of the longitudinal body
member web (diaphragm effect).
Tanks that weigh more than 50 kg have to be mounted according to the compressor installation instructions in section 6.9.8 ( page 123).
It is permissible to replace an AdBlue tank with another standard tank variant that conforms to the
type described in this body/equipment mounting directive.
Extending the AdBlue and hot water lines

It is permitted to extend the AdBlue and hot water lines
as long as the instructions in this section are observed.
Unplug the drained AdBlue and hot water lines from
the AdBlue tank.
The ends of the unplugged lines become the interface for line extension.
Only ends that have straight connectors may be extended; 90 angled connectors must be removed
and replaced with straight connectors (list of parts
required).
Note: 8.25 and 35 litre AdBlue tanks have straight
connectors. 85 and 95 litre tanks have angled connectors.
Assemble the extension lines using the part numbers
specified below.
Extend the connecting lines as required. Connect
corresponding plug connectors to the connecting
lines and secure in place using the prescribed singleeye clamps.
Install only straight plug connectors at the interface
(end of the original line).
Be sure to use the required straight or angled plug
connection on the tank side.
Fit the new extension lines to the interface and the
tank according to the routing instructions.
56
3.7 Exhaust system
List of parts required
Important specifications when routing the AdBlue

line
You will require the following part numbers to assemble

a line extension.
The insulating cover must cover the plug connectors

on the AdBlue tank and the supply unit completely to
prevent cold spot formation around the AdBlue lines.
Parts required for AdBlue line extension:

One urea line A 930 476 00 01 of EPDM (light grey)
with an inner diameter of 7.5 mm and a 3.75 mm
wall each for the supply and return line
Two single-eye clamps A 000 995 62 35 per tube
One straight plug connector A 005 997 18 89 per
tube (male connector)
One straight plug connector A 004 997 92 89
(female connector) or an angled connector A004
997 94 89 (female connector) per tube
Only use plug connector A 003 997 23 89 on a supply unit.
Parts required for hot water line extension:
One water tube A 930 501 00 82 of EPDM (black)
with an inner diameter of 9.0 mm and a 3.25 mm
wall
Two single-eye clamps A 000 995 65 35 per tube
One straight plug connector A 004 997 62 89 per
tube (male connector)
The AdBlue lines have to be routed along the shortest possible path to the AdBlue tank or the interface.
Avoid kinks in the lines at all costs.
Ensure that the Pandoid straps do not squash any
lines when you are fastening the lines.
The AdBlue suction height must not exceed 0.5 metres. This is defined as the difference in height between the AdBlue input on the supply unit and the
empty level in the AdBlue tank.
No part of the lines between the AdBlue tank and the
supply unit may be above or below the maximum
suction level (danger of air collecting in the bends,
which might impede operation).
The AdBlue line may not exceed a maximum length
of 5 metres between the AdBlue tank and the supply
unit.
Insulate the lines against cold as well as possible.
Only one interface is permissible for the extension.
Straight plug connector A 003 997 24 89 (female

connector), A004 997 44 89 and an angled connector A 004 997 75 89 (female connector).
57
3.7 Exhaust system
Conversion options for the exhaust system
List of parts
The installation point of the rear silencer is specified in

the engine and noise certificate. Moving the silencer is
only permissible in accordance with the specifications in
this section, and certificates will only be issued if the
specifications are adhered to.
The following part numbers are available for the assembly of exhaust line extensions.
Remove all the connecting parts of the catalytic converter. The lateral silencers are mounted in bearing
shells at the top and have a transverse support at the
bottom. Upright exhaust pipes have additional
brackets. The upright exhaust system is secured by
bracket of its own.
List of parts for engine BR 900 (certification number

RA 2001):
Pipe A 932 490 02 10 length 1 metre
Pipe A 932 490 03 10 length 2 metres
Pipe bend A 932 490 01 23 90
Hose clamp A 005 997 29 90
Pipe clamp N 071555 090501 acc. to DIN 71555

90.5 (surface protection not zinc phosphated, heat
resistant up to 500 C)
Warning! Components are heavy and must be secured during installation work.
List of parts for engines BR 450/ 500 (certification

number RA 2000):
Fit the catalytic converter in its new position.

Always use the original bearing shells of the upper
fastening for catalytic converters mounted on the
side. You may adapt the lower support to suit the
new location.
If it is not possible to fit the brace, the catalytic converter must be supported by a suitable bracket. This
bracket must be approved by the relevant department.
Pipe A 932 490 00 10 length 1 metre

Pipe A 932 490 01 10 length 2 metres
Pipe bend A 932 490 00 23 90
Hose clamp A 005 997 14 90
Pipe clamp N 071555 120502 acc. to DIN 71555
120.5 (surface protection not zinc phosphated, heat
resistant up to 500 C)
Use the original bracket for upright catalytic converters.

Do not attach the brackets in the middle of the longitudinal body member web (diaphragm effect).
It is not permitted to replace a catalytic converter
with an exhaust system from another manufacturer.
Converting to another standard silencer is only permitted in certain restricted circumstances and in
consultation with the department responsible
( page 33).
58
3.7 Exhaust system
Exhaust pipe extensions
MAG procedure:
The following section contains mandatory specifications

for making exhaust pipe extensions. General operating
licences/engine certificates are only retained if certified
stainless steel pipes (see list of parts) with special high
temperature insulation are used.
Shielding gas M 12 (97.5 Ar/2.5 Co2 )
The exhaust pipe diameter of engines BR 450 and

BR 500 is 100 mm (140 mm with insulation). The exhaust pipe diameter of the BR 900 engine is 90 mm
(130 mm with insulation).
are to be welded together in a gas-tight manner.
The stainless steel pipes/pipe segments must be TIG or

MAG welded.
Place a second marking 10 mm behind the end

marking
TIG procedure:
No. B1878102520
Filler metal 1 mm /15 kg
Coil/SG-X (15Cr Ni Mn 18 8)
Note the following when shortening a stainless steel
pipe section:
Mark the required distance on the pipe
Diam. of tungsten needle: 2.4 mm
Leave enough space for a pipe clamp where necessary
Current intensity: 30 amps
Cut the pipe at the mark
Welding material: 1.6 mm W 18 8 Mn = 1.4370
Remove the insulation up to the second marking
Nozzle: 11 mm /11 litre/min
Compress the insulating material by between 10 and

20 mm under the stainless steel foil
Welding gas: argon 4.8

Inert gas: argon 4.8
Seam preparation: cleaned with a stainless steel rotating
brush
Press the stainless steel foil of the insulation onto

the diameter of the pipe
Attach the pressed-down stainless steel foil to the
exhaust pipe using a stainless steel clamp as specified in the list of parts.
59
3.7 Exhaust system
Important requirements for the exhaust line extension
Only use components permitted for the engine in
question according to the list of parts.
At least one certificate number, RA 2001 or
RA 2000, has to remain on each pipe section. General operating licences/engine certificates are only
retained if certified stainless steel pipes with special
high temperature insulation are used.
At least 80 % of the pipe to be extended must be insulated.
The sum of all pipe extension angles may not exceed
270 degrees.
The maximum permissible pipe extension length is
3,000 mm, measured from the end of the standard
exhaust pipe to the entry point in the silencer. The
maximum distance between the cutting point of the
standard flexible tube and the entry point into the silencer may not exceed 3,900 mm.
The pipe must be welded in a gas-tight manner according to the prescribed welding procedure.
Brackets for pipe attachment to the vehicle frame
must be placed near pipe weld seams. Use pipe
clamps according to the list of parts. The connections to the frame are to be dimensioned correctly.
The distance between pipe brackets must not exceed 1,100 mm.
The flexible pipe section must not have a bend or offset.
60
3.8 Maintenance and repairs
3.8
Maintenance and repairs
3.8.1
Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
All work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Please make sure that you read the technical documentation before carrying out maintenance work, e.g.
the Operating Instructions and workshop information.
Always have maintenance work carried out in good
time. Failure to do so could otherwise lead to malfunctions or failure of systems relevant to safety. You
could then cause an accident and injure yourself or
others.
The body must not hamper maintenance and repair of
the vehicle in any way.
Maintenance points and assemblies must remain easily
accessible.
The Operating Instructions must be observed and if
necessary, supplemented.
Maintenance instructions
The following must be observed by the body/equipment

manufacturer before delivery of the vehicle:
Inspection due date.
Adjustment of the automatic load-sensitive brake
(ALB).
Check the condition and capacity of batteries and
service them in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
Check the headlamp adjustment or have this
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Retighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque.
When the vehicle is delivered by the body manufacturer, it must be accompanied by operating and
maintenance instructions, in the language of the
country in which the vehicle is to be operated, for all
and any assemblies fitted when attachments were
installed, for special-purpose bodies, for any equipment and/or for any conversions made to the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the scope of maintenance work to be carried out on the body corresponds to the Mercedes-Benz maintenance system
applicable to the relevant vehicle. This applies both
to the scope and type of service work, and for determining the servicing intervals based on time elapsed
and distance covered.
Stowage boxes must be fitted with maintenance

flaps or removable rear panels.
The battery compartment must be sufficiently ventilated.
Check the condition and capacity of batteries and
service them in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications ( page 62).
The cost of any additional work made necessary by the
body and which has to be carried out during warranty,
maintenance or repair work, will not be carried by
DaimlerChrysler AG.
61
3.8.2
Preparation for storing the vehicle
Maintenance of stored vehicles (in storage for more

than 1 month):
Check the oil level monthly.
If the vehicle is delivered in winter (salted roads), in

order to prevent damage to surfaces, have the vehicle
cleaned as soon as possible. Pay particular attention
to the transmission housing and light-alloy wheels.
Check the coolant level monthly.

Check the tyre pressure monthly.
Remove the battery.
Taking the vehicle out of storage:
Storage in enclosed spaces:
Check the fluid levels in the vehicle.
Clean the entire vehicle.
Correct the tyre pressures to those specified.
Check the oil and coolant levels.
Check the charge and fit the battery.
Increase the specified tyre pressures by 0.5 bar.
Clean the entire vehicle.
Release the handbrake and chock the wheels.

Disconnect the battery and lubricate the cable lugs
and terminals.
Storage in the open (less than 1 month):
Perform the same tasks as for storage in enclosed
spaces.
Close all air inlets and switch the heater to "Off".
Storage in the open (more than 1 month):
Perform the same tasks as for storage in enclosed
spaces.
Fold the windscreen wipers away from the windscreen.
Close all air inlets and switch the heater to "Off".
Remove the battery and store it according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.8.3
Battery maintenance and storage
To avoid damage to the battery, disconnect the battery

if the vehicle is to be parked up for a period longer than
1 week.
If the vehicle is parked up for periods longer than
1 month, remove the battery and store it in a dry place
at a temperature between 0 and 30 C.
The battery must be stored in an upright position.
The battery charge must be above 12.55 V.
!
If the battery voltage drops below 12.1 V, it will be
damaged and will have to be replaced.
The battery may be damaged if not used for long periods. This must be avoided by disconnecting the battery and storing it appropriately.
62
3.8.4
Preparation for handing over the

converted vehicle
The work and modifications carried out must be entered

in the Maintenance Booklet by the body manufacturer.
Checking the entire vehicle:
The vehicle is to be checked for faults and any damage
repaired.
If it is not known how long a vehicle with a hydraulic
clutch mechanism has been out of use, the brake fluid
must be renewed.
This does not apply to vehicles with hydraulic fluid (in accordance with sheet 345.0 of the Mercedes-Benz
Specifications for Service Products).
Checking the batteries:
The battery charge must be tested before delivering the
vehicle.
Checking the tyres:
The tyres must be checked for the correct pressure and
for damage before the vehicle is delivered. Damaged
tyres must be replaced.
Checking the wheel alignment:
It is recommended that wheel alignment be checked at
a qualified specialist workshop after any equipment, attachments or bodies have been installed, or any conversions have been made. Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
purpose.
All work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
i
For further information, contact any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or see the Mercedes-Benz Workshop
Information System (WIS) ( page 40).
63
3.9 Optional equipment
3.9
Optional equipment
The use of non-approved assemblies or conversion

parts and accessories can jeopardise the safety of the
vehicle.
To adapt the vehicle to the body in the best possible way,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the items of optional
equipment available as a code.
All items of optional equipment available as a code from
Mercedes Benz can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or from the technical advice service of
body manufacturers ( page 33).
Optional equipment (e.g. reinforced springs, frame reinforcement, auxiliary tanks, anti-roll bars, etc.) or retrofitted equipment increases the unladen weight of the
vehicle.
If springs or tyres of a different size are to be installed on
the chassis, there can be a considerable difference between the laden and unladen height of the chassis.
The actual vehicle weight and axle loads must be determined by weighing before installing a special-purpose
body.
Not all items of optional equipment can be installed in
every vehicle without problems. This applies in particular
for retrofits, because the required installation space may
already be occupied by other components, or the item of
optional equipment may require other components.
64
3.10 Pneumatic auxiliary consumers
3.10
Pneumatic auxiliary consumers
Ports four-circuit safety valve
Observe the following if pneumatic auxiliary consumers

are installed:
If additional compressed-air reservoirs are used,
they must be tested in accordance with EC Directive,
"Single pressure reservoirs" (87 /404/EEC); operating instructions must also be provided.
Auxiliary consumers must only be connected to port
24 of the four-circuit safety valve. Install a T-piece in
the compressed-air line if necessary.
To protect the remaining auxiliary consumers (on vehicle), connection is only permissible via an additional overflow valve without return flow and having an
opening pressure of between 7.3 and 7.5 bar.
In the case of auxiliary consumers with high or continuous air consumption, a dual-chamber compressed-air drier (code B 62) is required, as the
standard single chamber compressed-air drier can
become overloaded. Due to the increased air requirement, the dual-chamber compressed-air drier
may only be fitted in combination with a dual-cylinder air compressor (code M 32 /MZ 9).
m Brake circuit I
n Brake circuit II
o Trailer (Atego, Econic)
p Engine brake and auxiliary consumers
q Spring-loaded cylinder
r Clutch operation and gear shifting,
folding door (Econic)
65
3.10 Pneumatic auxiliary consumers
3.10.1 Maximum permissible air consumption
The air requirement must be checked in the case of arduous vehicle operation, e.g. stop/start traffic and/or
when installing pneumatic auxiliary consumers with high
air consumption.
Maximum permissible air consumption with doublecylinder compressor (code MZ9)
The total air consumption must not exceed the limit

curve indicated in the diagrams. All air consumers are to
be considered, e.g. brakes, air suspension, trailer, etc.
If air consumption exceeds the limit curve indicated,
problems can be expected in the air supply, e.g. insufficient dehumidification, overheating damage, etc.
Maximum permissible air consumption with singlecylinder compressor
min-1 = average engine speed

l/min = permissible air consumption (litres/minute) uncompressed air
min-1 = average engine speed

l/min = permissible air consumption (litres/minute) uncompressed air
66
4 Technical threshold values for planning

4.1 Vehicle overhang and technical wheelbases
4.1
Vehicle overhang and technical wheelbases
Risk of accident
The body must be designed in such a way that a placing of excessive load weight at the rear is prevented.
It is important to comply with the points listed below,
otherwise the necessary steering and braking forces
for safe vehicle operation cannot be transferred to the
road.
When calculating the length of the vehicle overhang,
always take into account the permissible axle loads
and the minimum front axle load.
Comply with the minimum front axle load
( page 70).
Take the weight of optional equipment into consideration when calculating the overhang.
Maximum vehicle overhang ()
Two-axle vehicle
Three-axle
vehicle
Four-axle vehicle
65 % of the
wheelbase
70 % of the
technical
wheelbase
70 % of the
technical
wheelbase
(Atego (BM 97X)

60 % of
wheelbase)
For some models, an extended frame overhang is available as optional equipment (code CR2 or CR3) from the
factory.
R = wheelbase
Ri = technical wheelbase
= overhang
i
Technical wheelbases (Ri)
For calculation of the technical wheelbase see Section 8.4 ( page 240)
Comply with all national laws, guidelines and vehicle
registration regulations.
67

4.2 Load distribution, height of centre of gravity, anti-roll bars
4.2
Load distribution, height of centre of

gravity, anti-roll bars
Risk of accident
It is important to comply with the points listed below;
road.
4.2.1
Weight distribution
Avoid placing excessive loads on one side of the vehicle.

The wheel load (1 /2 the axle load) may be exceeded by
a maximum of 4%.
i
You can find information about calculating the height
of the vehicle centre of gravity in the Mercedes-Benz
body/equipment manufacturer system (MB-AS)
( page 38) in the "Tools" catalogue (tipping limit calculation).
Atego (BM 97X)
Fire-engine chassis with all-wheel-drive are supplied
with ABS deactivation and without ALB controller (loadsensitive brake pressure control). For this reason, the
rear axle to unladen weight ratio on the vehicle with
body/equipment (on the unladen vehicle) must not fall
below those listed below:
Vehicle Vehicle
type
Model
Ratio of rear axle
designation load to gross
vehicle weight
(unladen
vehicle)
Atego
9.. AF
976.33
0.42
12.. AF
976.35
0.50
13.. AF
976.36
0.54
15.. AF
976.37
0.56
Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity.

Example:
Permissible axle load 10,000 kg
Permissible axle load distribution 5,200 kg to
4,800 kg
4.2.2
Height of centre of gravity
For the vehicle with installed body/equipment to obtain

approval, a calculation of the height of the vehicle's centre of gravity when laden must be submitted pursuant to
EC Brakes Directive 71/320/EEC. The principles of calculation and the permissible height of the vehicle's centre of gravity can be obtained from the department
responsible ( page 33).
Mercedes-Benz cannot make any statements concerning the driving, braking and steering characteristics of
vehicles with attachments, bodies, equipment or conversions with unfavourably-located centres of gravity (e.g.
at the rear, very high, or displaced to one side). The vehicle conversion/body manufacturer is responsible for
the operating safety of the vehicle once these modifications have been made.
68

4.2 Load distribution, height of centre of gravity, anti-roll bars
4.2.3
Stabiliser/Telligent roll control
Make sure that the vehicle you are building is correctly

equipped. Mercedes-Benz provides stabilisers and/or
Telligent roll control for different model series. It is recommended that one of these equipment items be used
for vehicles with high loads in accordance with the table
below. Stabilising equipment is required if the vehicle is
used for extremely high loads.
Types of load
Height of centre of gravity (A) above the upper
edge of the chassis frame
up to
550 mm
Normal load
550 1,250 mm High load

over
1,250 mm
Extremely high load
If no stabilising equipment is available for a model series,

or if this equipment is unsuitable due to operating conditions (such a need for off-road capability), the mounting
frame must be designed in a manner that stabilises the
entire vehicle in consultation with the department responsible.
69

4.3 Steerability
4.3
Steerability
Risk of accident
road.
In order to ensure the vehicle remains sufficiently steerable under all load states, the minimum front axle load
must always be maintained. Consult the department responsible in the event of any deviations ( page 33).
!
The permissible front axle load must not be exceeded.
Observe the notes on product liability ( page 36).
Axle/tyres fitted to vehicle
Minimum front axle load
Actros, Atego, Axor, Econic
25% of the gross vehicle

weight
With loading tailgate
Two-axle vehicle
With loading crane on rear of vehicle
30% of the gross vehicle

weight
Operation with single-axle trailer

(centre-axle trailer)
Operation with centre-axle trailer, truck/ 35% of the gross vehicle
trailer combination ratio > 1:1
weight
Two- and three-axle vehicles in solo oper- Without assemblies on rear of vehicle 22% of the gross vehicle
ation
No operation with centre-axle trailer weight (only in exceptional circumstances, observe the folThree-axle vehicles 6 x 2
Centre of gravity not high
lowing notes)
Two-axle vehicle with single tyres
Special rule for Atego fire engines
( page 68).
Minimum axle load relation

1/1.45
70

4.4 Clearance for assemblies and cab
4.4
Clearance for assemblies and cab
Attachment above cab
Certain clearances must be maintained in order to ensure the function and operational safety of assemblies.
Observe the permissible centre of gravity location

and front axle load.
Observe data on dimensions in the tender drawings.
Make sure that there is sufficient space for tilting.
Cab tilting range clearance
Read and observe the corresponding section in the

Operating Instructions.
The Mercedes-Benz Workshop Information System
(WIS) is available to you as an additional source of information ( page 40).
Gearshift linkage
Sufficient distance to the body, including when the
cab is tilted.
Observe the vertical slewing range of the semitrailer.
Spring-loaded brake cylinder
For vehicles with drum brakes, check that the springloaded brake emergency release screw moves freely
and is accessible.
Engine, transmission, retarder
Minimum distance to body 30 mm.
71

4.4 Clearance for assemblies and cab
Cab
Vehicle
Cab
short with
extension
(F20)
1,440
450
Long (F04)
1,440
860
Long high
(F04+DD5)
1,440
860
Vehicle
Cab
Atego (97X)
Short (F07)
1,380
330
Short with
extended rear
wall (F20)
1,380
510
Long (F04)
1,380
930
Long high
(F04+DD5)
1,380
930
Vehicle
Cab
Econic
High (FH7)
1,850
540
Low (FH8)
1,850
540
The distance between the cab and the body or vertical exhaust must be at least 50 mm.
Clearance for tilting cab
Vehicle
Cab
Actros
Short (F07)
1,440
with V6 engine
B
5501)
6102)
1
2
Short (F07)
1,440
with V8 engine
710
Standard (F05) 1,440
710
Long (F04)
1,440
910
Long high
(F15)
1,440
910
Make sure that the minimum mounting frame height is

sufficient for the short cab.
Observe the modified front axle position (60 mm further
to the rear) on vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle
weight of more than 12,000 kg.
With a minimum mounting frame height of 200 mm

With a minimum mounting frame height of 120 mm
Vehicle
Cab
Axor
(94X, 95X)
Short (F07)
1440
405
72

4.5 Wind deflector
4.5
Wind deflector
Actros (BM 93X), Axor (BM 94X, 95X), Econic

Wind deflectors on the cab roof may only be fitted to the
mounting elements provided for this purpose. Drilling
holes in the cab roof for the purpose of mounting a wind
deflector is not permitted.
A certificate of endorsement issued by the department
responsible for other roof attachments (e.g. air-conditioning system, sleeper cabin) is required ( page 33)
Atego (BM 97X)
On vehicles with a short cab with three-point bearing and
without tilting hydraulics a torsion bar with a higher return torque may be necessary. If the weight of the wind
deflector is greater than 50 kg, a four-point bearing with
tilting hydraulics is required. This cannot be retrofitted.
i
Observe the additional notes in Section 3 "Planning of
bodies" ( page 46).
73

4.6 Telligent stability control
4.6
Telligent stability control
Wheelbase modifications on vehicles with Telligent

stability control are not allowed (currently only
4 x 2 Actros semitrailer tractors). It is definitely not permitted to fit additional axles.
It is not permitted to move or attach additional equipment or pneumatic/electric lines to the stabilising electronics in the chassis (area of 1st cross member)
(A 029 545 49 32 or A 033 545 38 32).
Risk of accident
If these points are not complied with, there is a risk of

the stability control being activated incorrectly, which
could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.
The vehicle could skid, the driver could lose control of
the vehicle as a result and cause an accident.
74

4.7 Semitrailers
4.7
Semitrailers
!
Semitrailers with pneumatic suspension must not
lean over by more than 3 to 4 when subjected to a
lateral acceleration of 0.3 g so that the semitrailer
tractor does not have to bear the entire force caused
by the lateral inclination of the semitrailer.
The manufacturer of the semitrailer is responsible
for compliance with the regulations concerning driving the semitrailer-tractor combination in a circle (in
Germany, this is Section 32 (BO Kraftkreis) of the national road traffic licensing regulations (StVZO).
Check the front and rear slewing radius on the semitrailer and the vertical slewing range.
If necessary, observe the minimum height of the
semitrailer coupling according to ISO standard
1726.
Observe the clearance for the gearshift linkage and
above the tank filler neck.
75

4.8 Gross weight of tractor/trailer combination
4.8
Gross weight of tractor/trailer combination
The following section describes vehicle equipment that

is required for an increased gross tractor/trailer combination weight. You can obtain the manufacturer certificate for modifying the vehicle documents from the
responsible department in your country.
In Germany:
DaimlerChrysler AG
Kundendienst Nutzfahrzeuge
DCVD /KN Berlin
Tel. +49 (0)190 812 798 (1.86 euro/min)
Fax +49 (0)190 812 799 (1.86 euro/fax)
Axor (only BM 94X)
In the case of light- and medium-duty operation with a
higher gross weight of tractor/trailer combinations, the
following restrictions and notes on the drive train must
be observed.
If the gross tractor/trailer combination weight is
greater than 45 t, the relevant codes for coupling devices (end cross members and trailer couplings or
semitrailer couplings and mounting plates) are available.
The country-specific legislation concerning increased gross weight of tractor/trailer combination
must be observed.
The standard end cross member on semitrailer tractors is only suitable for fitting a manoeuvring coupling, which is not approved for drawing a trailer.
Semitrailer tractors 18xx LS 4 x 2 (BM 944.032/

033) with code MM4/ 7/8/9 engine variant and
code MS3/MS4/MS5 engine version and standard
cooling system
If the vehicle is equipped with a code GC2 (G24016 /11.7-0.69) transmission and a code AM3 rear
axle, a maximum gross tractor/trailer combination
weight of 60 t is possible.
Axor2 platform chassis 25xx L 6 x 2 (BM 940.203/
204/205) with code MM4/7/8/9 engine variant
and code MS3/MS4/MS5 engine version and
standard cooling system
If the vehicle is equipped with a code GC2 (G24016 /11.7-0.69) transmission and a code AM3 rear
axle, a maximum gross tractor/trailer combination
Axor2 tipper chassis 26xxK 6 x4 (BM 942.14x) code
MM7/8/9 engine variant and code MS3 engine version and standard cooling system
If the vehicle is equipped with the standard code
GD5 transmission and code AM4 rear axle, or with
the optional code GC3 (G2 10-16 /14.2-0.83) and
AM4, a maximum gross tractor/trailer combination
Axor2 tipper chassis 32xxK 8 x4/4 (BM 942.304/
305/307) code MM7/ 8/ 9 engine variant and code
MS3 engine version and standard cooling system
If the vehicle is equipped with the standard code
GD5 transmission and code AM4 rear axle, or with
the optional code GC3 (G2 10-16 /14.2-0.83) and
AM4, a maximum gross tractor/trailer combination
If deviations from the described minimums are required,
a small increase in the gross tractor/trailer combination weight may be acceptable for occasional operation
(< 10 % of the total distance travelled) and with restricted warranty rights. These cases must be agreed in detail
with the certification office stated above.
76

Actros (BM 93X)
Vehicle equipment for use with a higher gross weight of
the tractor/trailer combination.
The scopes of equipment listed there were only valid for
Actros models with EURO 3 engines (MX. engine code).
Some conditions changed for increased gross tractor/
trailer vehicle weights with the introduction of EURO 3
engines (MV. engine code).
The following restrictions and scope of equipment
must therefore be observed for Actros 2 models
with MV engine codes or MX0 engine code:
For traction reasons,18-t vehicles (4x2) can only be
approved up to a maximum permissible gross weight
of the tractor/trailer combination of 68 t.
18-t and 20-t all-wheel-drive vehicles can be approved up to a maximum permissible gross weight of
the tractor/trailer combination of 80 t.
Vehicles equipped with Telligent automatic gearshift
(code GE2) can only be approved up to a maximum
permissible gross weight of the tractor/trailer combination of 60 t.
If a gross weight of the tractor/trailer combination
in excess of 80 t is required, the vehicle is to be
equipped with a code G81 twin-plate clutch. For
gross tractor/trailer combination weights in excess
of 100 t, a code G02 torque converter clutch is recommended. From a gross tractor/trailer combination weight of over 120 t, code G02 is mandatory.
tractor/trailer combination weight is 55 t for occasional operation (< 10 % of the total distance travelled).
If the gross tractor/trailer combination weight is
greater than 45 t, the following trailer couplings and
rear cross braces can be used for articulated combinations (code Q39 + QS1 or code Q26 + QS2).
The relevant MPCs are responsible for any particular
country-specific requirements (e.g. the brake system) related to increased gross tractor/trailer combination weights.
Semitrailer tractors which are to be fitted with a
G150 trailer coupling must be equipped with a code
Q94 end cross member. The standard end cross
member on semitrailer tractors is only suitable for
fitting a manoeuvring coupling, which is not approved for drawing a trailer.
The overview shows the mandatory radiator and fan
equipment for road/tipper/all-wheel-drive vehicles according to their engine output and desired increased
gross tractor/trailer combination weight.
The mandatory equipment options must be checked in
terms of their availability according to the model/model
series and in accordance with the following overview.
For gross tractor/trailer combination weights greater than 45 t, a HL7 rear axle with 300 mm diameter
crown wheel is required (code AM1 or AM3, depending on model). The HL7 rear axle with 233 mm crown
wheel (code AM4) is restricted to occasional operation (< 10 % of the total distance travelled) with a
maximum permissible gross tractor/trailer combination weight of 60 t. With the HL8 rear axle (code
AM5), the maximum permissible gross tractor/trailer weight is 60 t for occasional operation (< 10 % of
the total distance travelled). With the HL6 rear axle
(code AM9), the maximum permissible gross
77

Required radiator/fan equipment for
OM 501 LA V6 engines
I. Increased gross tractor/trailer combination
weight 80 t
Engine
Vehicle type
Required codes for
OM 501 LA
Radiator (surface area)
Fan
235 kW /320 bhp

265 kW /360 bhp
300 kW /408 bhp
320 kW /435 bhp
Road vehicles
Tipper/all-wheel drive
MP2 (82 dm2)
Standard
335 kW /456 bhp
Road vehicles
Tipper/all-wheel drive
Standard (82 dm2)

MP2 (82 dm2)
Standard
Standard
II. Increased gross tractor/trailer combination

weight up to 120 t
Engine
WSK
OM 501 LA
(Code G02)
235 kW /320 bhp

265 kW /360 bhp
300 kW /408 bhp
320 kW /435 bhp
Without
Without
335 kW /456 bhp
Without/with
Without/with
Vehicle type
Road vehicles
Tipper/all-wheel
drive
Road vehicles
Tipper/all-wheel
drive
Required codes for

Radiator (surface
area)
Fan
MP2 (82 dm2)

MP2 (82 dm2)
ML3
ML3
Standard (82 dm2)

MP2 (82 dm2)
ML3
ML3

series.
78

Required radiator/fan equipment for
OM 502 LA V8 engines
I. Increased gross tractor/trailer combination
weight 80 t
Engine
WSK
OM 502 LA
(Code G02)
All engine outputs
With/Without
With/Without
Vehicle type
Required codes for

Radiator (surface
area)
Fan
Road vehicles
Tipper/all-wheel
drive
Standard (82 dm2)

MP2 (82 dm2)
ML3 (standard)
Standard
Vehicle type
Required codes for
II. Increased gross tractor/trailer combination

weight up to 120 t
Engine
WSK
OM 502 LA
(Code G02)
All engine outputs
Without
Without
Road vehicles
Tipper/all-wheel
drive
Radiator (surface
area)
Fan
Standard (82 dm2)

MP2 (82 dm2)
ML3 (standard)
ML3

series.
If it is necessary to deviate from the minimums described in this section, a small increase in the gross
tractor/trailer combination weight may be acceptable
for occasional operation (< 10 % of the total distance
travelled) and with restricted warranty rights. These cases must be agreed in detail with the certification office
stated on page 70.
79
5 Damage prevention
5.1 Electrical system
5.1
Reversed polarity of the power supply can damage

the control units beyond repair.
Electrical system
Risk of accident
Work carried out incorrectly on the electrical system

may impair its function. This may lead to failure of
components or parts relevant to safety.
Accident prevention regulations must be observed
when working on the vehicle.
Specific national guidelines and laws must be observed.
Risk of fire
If work is carried out on live wires, there is a risk of

short circuit.
Before starting work on the electrical system, disconnect the on-board network from the power source,
e.g. batteries.
Never start the engine if the batteries are not firmly

connected (bolts on battery terminals tightened).
Do not loosen or disconnect the battery terminals
when the engine is running.
If the batteries are discharged, the engine can be
jump-started using jump leads and another vehicle's
batteries. Observe the Operating Instructions. Do
not use a rapid charging device to jump-start the vehicle.
Only tow-start the vehicle if the batteries are connected.
The batteries may only be charged with a rapid
charging device if they are disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system. The positive and negative
terminals must be disconnected.
i
Installing additional electrical consumers
( page 134).
i
Observe the notes on operating and vehicle safety in
Section 1 "Introduction" ( page 8 and 9).
Batteries
Do not place any metal objects or tools on the batteries.
There is a risk of short circuit if the positive terminal
clamp on the connected battery comes into contact
with vehicle parts. This could cause the highly explosive gas mixture to ignite. You and others could be
seriously injured as a result.
When disconnecting the batteries, always connect
the negative terminal clamp first and then the positive terminal.
When connecting the batteries, always disconnect
the positive terminal clamp first and then the negative terminal.
80
5 Damage prevention
5.1 Electrical system
Lines, plug connections and control units
A plug connection must not be unplugged from or
plugged into the control units while the ignition is on.
Lines must be protected from heat by means of appropriate insulation.
Route cables in such a way that chafing cannot occur, particularly at crossover points and sharp edges. If necessary, use cable ducts or guide pipes.
Do not take any measurements from the connector
contact points using unsuitable instruments (probe
tips, bare wire ends, etc.) This can lead to contact
problems due to the build up of transition resistance.
Use suitable test cables.
Additional indicator lamps may be fitted to the instrument cluster by the body manufacturer. If the
power to these lamps is supplied via the X3/18-10
instrument-cluster connector, it is possible to dim
the display.
If a battery isolating switch is retrofitted, it is necessary to consult the department responsible
( page 33).
81
5 Damage prevention
5.2 Brake hoses/cables and lines
5.2
Brake hoses/cables and lines
Risk of accident
Work carried out incorrectly on brake hoses, cables or

lines may impair their function. This may lead to failure of components or parts relevant to safety.
Compressed-air, fuel, gas and hydraulic lines and brake
hoses must be covered, or removed if necessary before
welding, drilling, grinding or working with cutting discs.
The system must be checked for pressure loss and leaks

after installing compressed-air, fuel, gas or hydraulic
lines or brake hoses.
No other lines may be secured to the brake hoses.
Lines must be protected from heat by means of appropriate insulation.
The lines must be routed in such a manner that pressure
loss is not increased.
82
5 Damage prevention
5.3 Mobile communications systems
5.3
Mobile communications systems
Observe the ADR/GGVS regulations (European Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road and German Law on the Road
Transport of Hazardous Goods). You must also comply
with manufacturer's notes and installation instructions.
When mobile communication systems (e.g. telephone,
CB radio) are retrofitted, the following requirements
must be fulfilled in order to avoid malfunctions developing on the vehicle at a later stage.
Equipment
The equipment must have official approval and correspond to DIN VDE 0879, part 2.
The equipment must be permanently installed.
Operation of portable or mobile equipment inside
the cab is permissible only when connected to a permanently installed exterior aerial.
The transmitter unit must be installed as far away
from the vehicle's electronic system as possible.
Protect the equipment from moisture.
Connection and cable routing

The connection is to be made directly to terminal 30
via an additional fuse.
A voltage transformer must supply power to 12-V appliances on vehicles with a 24-V system.
Disconnect the equipment from the electrical system before jump-starting.
Route cables along the shortest possible route (no
loops) and twist them.
Ensure that the equipment has a good earth connection to the body (aerial and appliance).
The aerial and connecting cables between the transmitter, receiver and operating panel must be routed
separately from the vehicle wiring harness, as close
to the body earth as possible.
Do not kink or squash the aerial cable.
i
Observe the permissible operating temperature,

protect against strong mechanical vibrations.
Aerial (for two-way radios)
The aerial must have official approval.
83
5 Damage prevention
5.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
5.4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Electrical interference occurs in the vehicle electrical circuits because of the various consumers.
At Mercedes-Benz, electronic components installed at
the factory are checked for their electromagnetic compatibility in the vehicle.
When electric or electronic systems are retrofitted, they
must be tested in terms of their electromagnetic compatibility, which must then be documented.
The equipment must have type approval in accordance
with EC Directive 95/54/EEC and must bear the "e"
mark.
The following standards provide information on this:
DIN 40839
DIN 57879, Part 3
VDE 0879, Part 3
DC 10614 (EMC component requirements)
DC 10613 (EMC vehicle requirements)
EU Directive 95/54/EEC
i
84
5 Damage prevention
5.5 Welding work
5.5
Cover the fuel tank, gas and fuel system (lines, etc.)
before carrying out welding work.
Welding work
Risk of injury
Welding work in the vicinity of the airbags can cause

the restraint system to malfunction.
Welding work near the airbags is strictly forbidden.
The airbag could be triggered or may no longer function correctly.
The legal stipulations regarding the transport and storage of airbag units must be observed.
The law concerning hazardous explosive substances must be observed.
The following safety measures must be observed to prevent damage to components caused by overvoltage during welding work:
Disconnect the positive and negative terminals from
the battery and cover them.
Avoid welding work on inaccessible cavities in the

cab.
Plug welding is only permissible in the vertical webs
of the longitudinal frame member.
Weld seams must be ground down and reinforced
with angular sections to prevent notching due to fusion penetration.
Avoid welds in bends.
There must be a distance of at least 15 mm between
weld seams and the outer edges.
!
Do not connect the arc welder earth clamp terminal to assemblies such as the engine, transmission or axles.
Welding work is not permitted on assemblies
such as the engine, transmission or axles.
Connect the welding-unit earth terminal directly to

the part to be welded.
Do not touch electronic component housings

(e.g. control modules) and electric lines with the
welding electrode or the earth contact clamp of the
welding unit.
For further information about welded connections,

see Section 5 "Damage prevention" ( page 85) and
Section 6 "Modifications to the basic vehicle"
( page 100), as well as the Mercedes-Benz Workshop Information System (WIS) ( page 40).
Before welding, cover springs and air bellows to protect them from welding splatter. Do not touch
springs with welding electrodes or welding tongs.
85
5 Damage prevention
5.6 Corrosion protection measures
5.6
Corrosion protection measures
After work has been carried out on the vehicle, such as

the installation of attachments, special-purpose bodies,
equipment, or after conversions, the areas affected must
be protected by means of surface and anti-corrosion
protection measures.
Prevention of contact corrosion by electrical

insulation
Planning measures
Corrosion protection measures should be included in the
planning and design through the selection of suitable
materials and the arrangement of the components.
!
If two different metals are brought into contact with
each other through an electrolyte (e.g. atmospheric
humidity), a galvanic connection is created. Electrochemical corrosion occurs, with the baser of the two
metals being damaged. The further apart the two
metals are in the electrochemical potential series,
the more intense electrochemical corrosion becomes.
Electrochemical corrosion must therefore be prevented by appropriate treatment of the components
or by their insulation, or it must be kept to a minimum
by selecting suitable materials.
1 Insulating washer
2 Insulating sleeve
The use of electrical insulation such as washers, sleeves
or bushings can prevent contact corrosion.
86
5 Damage prevention
5.6 Corrosion protection measures
Component design measures
Coating measures
Corrosion can be reduced by design measures, in particular the design of the joints between the same or different materials.
The vehicle can be protected against corrosion by the

application of a protective coating (e.g. galvanisation,
protective paint or flame-applied zinc coating).
There is a risk of dirt and moisture collecting in corners,

edges, beads and folds.
After all work on the vehicle
Corrosion protection can be implemented at the design

stage by using suitable surfaces and run-offs and avoiding gaps where components are joined.
Gaps at welded connections caused by the design
and how to avoid them
Remove drilling swarf.

Deburr sharp edges.
Remove any burned paintwork and thoroughly prepare surfaces for painting.
Prime and paint all unprotected parts.
Preserve cavities with wax preservative.
Carry out corrosion protection measures on the underbody and frame parts.
A = suitable
B = unsuitable
(welded through)
(gaps)
87
5 Damage prevention
5.7 Painting
5.7
Painting
Environmental note
If handled incorrectly, paints and lacquers are harmful

to the environment and human health.
Dispose of paints and lacquers in an environmentally
responsible manner.
Check the compatibility of the paint before painting
over. To prevent colour variations in the paintwork of
bodies, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
paint that has been tested and approved for the type of
vehicle concerned. The primer used in the factory and
the Mercedes-Benz paint numbers can be obtained from
the department responsible ( page 33).
Mask the following areas before painting:
Sealing surfaces
Windows
Contact areas between wheels and wheel hubs
Contact areas for wheel nuts
Vents on transmission, axles, etc.
Disc brakes
Door locks
!
Do not exceed a temperature of 80 C for drying the
paint.
i
Further information about paints can be obtained
from the Mercedes-Benz Workshop Information System (WIS) ( page 40).
88
5 Damage prevention
5.8 Engine
5.8
Engine
There is a warning buzzer in the cab within the driver's

hearing range.
The buzzer audibly warns the driver if, for example:
the maximum permissible engine speed is exceeded
the maximum permissible coolant temperature is exceeded
the coolant level is too low
the oil level or oil pressure in the engine is too low
!
If the buzzer sounds, the operating safety of the
vehicle is jeopardised. Switch off the engine immediately (paying attention to the traffic situation).
In the case of crane operation from outside the
cab (e.g. loading crane), a visual warning device
must also be installed in the area of the control
unit.
89
5 Damage prevention
5.9 Leaf springs
5.9
Leaf springs
Parabolic springs
Damaged parabolic springs must be completely replaced.
It is not permitted to replace individual spring leaves.
Only use springs that have been tested and approved for the type of vehicle concerned. Additional
spring leaves may not be installed for reinforcement.
Do not damage the spring-leaf surfaces and corrosion protection during installation work.
Before carrying out welding work, cover springs to
protect them against welding spatter. Do not touch
with welding electrodes or welding tongs.
90
5 Damage prevention
5.10 Tilting the cab
5.10
Tilting the cab
Risk of injury
Before tilting the cab, please make sure that you read
the "Tilting the cab" section in the detailed Operating
Instructions.
You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers, which
could result in injury to yourself or others.
91
5 Damage prevention
5.11 Towing and tow-starting
5.11
Towing and tow-starting
Before towing or tow-starting, please make sure that

you read the "Towing" section in the detailed Operating Instructions. You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers, cause an accident and injure yourself or others.
!
Failure to observe the Operating Instructions can result in damage to the vehicle.
92
5 Damage prevention
5.12 Risk of fire
5.12
Risk of fire
Risk of fire
If work is carried out on live wires, there is a risk of

short circuit.
Before starting work on the electrical system, disconnect the on-board network from the power source,
e.g. batteries.
With all bodies make sure that neither flammable objects nor flammable liquids can come into contact
with hot assemblies (including through leakages in
the hydraulic system) such as the engine, transmission, exhaust system, turbocharger, etc.
In order to avoid the risk of fire, appropriate covers,
seals or heat shields must be installed during assembly.
93
5 Damage prevention
5.13 Gas system
5.13
Gas system
Risk of accident/explosion
5.13.1 Regulations and information sheets

Removal instructions for compressed-gas reservoirs
VdTV code of practice 757
German Employers Liability Insurance Association
safety regulations
The vehicles are supplied by Mercedes-Benz with a

fully filled natural gas system.
The vehicle's compressed-gas system can build up a
maximum pressure of 200 bar (15 C) between the
compressed-gas reservoirs and the pressure regulator (see the pressure reservoir display in the cab or
the refuelling unit pressure gauge).
Removal of the compressed-gas system when mounting the body/equipment is to be avoided whenever
possible.
Work on the compressed-gas system may only be carried out by trained (skilled) personnel.
The unions used on the compressed-gas lines are
double clamp ring bolt connections and may only be
fitted by skilled personnel.
If the compressed-gas reservoirs do need to be removed by the body manufacturer, a licensed expert
must check the high-pressure section of the vehicle
gas system for leaks once the reservoirs have been
reinstalled on the vehicle.
Never drop filled compressed-gas reservoirs and never open the reservoir shut-off valve on a reservoir
which has been removed from the vehicle.
The carbon-fibre jacket on composite compressedgas reservoirs must not be damaged under any circumstances because its strength can then no longer
be guaranteed.
After the compressed-gas system has been assembled, the closed reservoir shut-off valves must only be
opened slowly (response of flow restrictor).
94
5 Damage prevention
5.13 Gas system
5.13.2 Safety when working with natural gas
Risk of explosion
When working with natural gas vehicles and their fuel,

observe the safety regulations for constructing and
operating natural gas systems in depots and vehicles
(German Employers Liability Insurance Association
for trams, subways and railways).
Work on the compressed-gas system may only be carried out by trained personnel, whereby a suitable reliable supervisor who has received the necessary
appropriate instruction and who is always present on
the premises ensures compliance with the protection
measures (Section 4 Paragraph 2 of the VBG 50).
Natural gas vehicles may only be parked in depots
which have sufficient ventilation (forced upwards ventilation). Depots with a surface area greater than
100 m must be equipped with mechanical ventilation
systems and CO systems for measuring and controlling the ventilation system and for providing necessary warnings (CO monitoring systems). If these
systems are not to be installed, you must apply for exemption from the local building inspection authority.
If there is insufficient ventilation in the depot, the vehicle may only be parked in the open.
If it is necessary to flush the natural gas system with
inert gas to neutralise it, only an inert gas which poses
no risk of ignition may be employed to this effect
(Section 7 Paragraphs 3 and 4 of the VBG 50). A suitable inert gas, for instance, is nitrogen. Compressed
air must not be used under any circumstances due to
the possible risk of ignition.
If operations involving the creation of flame and

sparks, such as welding, torch cutting or grinding, are
carried out in the vicinity of the natural gas system,
you must maintain a distance of at least 1 m from the
natural gas system. Only if the relevant section of the
natural gas system has been drained previously and
flushed with inert gas or if it has been protected
against high temperatures and sources of ignition,
e.g. if it is shielded by temperature-resistant mineral
fibre matting, is it permissible to undercut this distance.
If the compressed-gas reservoirs are removed without
the lines having been flushed with inert gas, seal the
ends of the gas system immediately using suitable
seal caps.
Always keep a towing vehicle prepared for emergencies (fire, gas leaks) so that it is possible to tow the
faulty or burning vehicle away from the depot and to
a safe location as fast as possible.
Natural gas vehicles must be marked in the workshop
and depot areas by means of signs and warning notices.
Compile operating instructions in accordance with
Section 20 of the German regulation concerning hazardous materials (GefStoffV) for work on natural gas
vehicles.
95
5 Damage prevention
5.13 Gas system
5.13.3 Precautions for the removal of the
compressed-gas reservoirs
The compressed-gas system must be depressurised. To
do this, close the shut-off valves on all compressed-gas
reservoirs and consume the remaining natural gas in the
high-pressure section (from the shut-off valves to the
pressure regulator) by running the engine.
When the engine has switched off automatically, there
will be residual pressure in the compressed-gas lines.
The remaining natural gas must be pumped out.
5.13.4 Removed compressed-gas reservoirs

Openings on lines and fittings must be sealed tight
using suitable seal caps if the compressed-gas reservoirs are removed.
Only store removed compressed-gas reservoirs and
packages in locations with adequate ventilation
(forced through-flow ventilation, the airflow being in
an upward direction) (ZH1/454 German safety
regulations for vehicle maintenance).
Protect reservoirs from excessive heat (60 C).
If, for any reason, the remaining natural gas in the highpressure section cannot be consumed by the engine, it
is possible to extract the natural gas at the refuelling
unit. The ventilation valve must be closed again after the
gas has been extracted and sealed with lead by the relevant authority.
96
5 Damage prevention
5.13 Gas system
5.13.5 Painting
5.13.6 Natural gas high-pressure lines
In the case of composite compressed-gas reservoirs

(reservoirs with a carbon-fibre jacket), only the metal
section of the compressed-gas reservoir may be
painted and not the carbon-fibre jacket.
A minimum distance of 20 mm from the lines must

be maintained when fitting the body supplier's components (pumps, cylinders, etc.) in the area of the
compressed-gas lines.
Shut-off valves and markings (type plates, inspection

plates, etc.) on the compressed-gas system must be
covered before painting operations are commenced.
Care must be taken when routing cables (electrical

system, etc.) that they do not chafe against the compressed-gas lines.
Natural gas high-pressure lines must be marked in

accordance with DIN 2403 (marking of pipes according to conveyed substance) using the group colour in
colour rings or along the entire length of the line (only necessary if painted by the body/equipment manufacturer; natural gas high-pressure lines are
marked by the truck manufacturer).
Neighbouring mounting brackets must be no more

than 1,000 mm apart (VdTV Code of Practice 757)
if it is necessary to reposition or remove the brackets for the compressed-gas lines.
The vehicle's compressed-gas reservoirs must first

be removed and the other parts of the natural gas
system completely drained and flushed with inert
gas if the natural gas system is to be subjected to
temperatures above 60 C during paint drying (drying chambers/enamel finishing) or other such work.
The routing of the lines must not be modified as this

is certified by the responsible authority.
Under no circumstances may any parts of the compressed-gas system (compressed-gas reservoirs,
compressed-gas lines) show any signs of damage,
such as marking (e.g. chafing) or burning (e.g. from
weld splatter); otherwise they must be replaced with
new parts. The responsible authority or a licensed
expert would then have to repeat the check for
leaks.
97
5 Damage prevention
5.13 Gas system
5.13.7 Exhaust system
The silencer mounting must not be modified; the
length of the line between the turbocharger and the
silencer must not be extended (alteration of the
emission values as a result of line length modification).
The exhaust system must be fitted at least 100 mm
away from all parts of the compressed-gas system if
the exhaust system is subsequently modified by the
body/equipment manufacturer. A heat shield must
be inserted if any parts of the compressed-gas system are less than 200 mm from the exhaust system.
The same applies to sources of heat fitted by the
body/equipment manufacturer.
5.13.8 Body mounting

The distance between the upper edge of the compressed-gas reservoir support (cover plate) and the
lower edge of the body must be at least 50 mm.
The body must not be secured to the compressedgas reservoir support brackets under any circumstances.
No additional drilling nor welding work may be performed in and on the brackets (brackets are certified
by the relevant authority).
The compressed-gas system (compressed-gas reservoirs) must not be repositioned or modified under
any circumstances.
Drill bores in the longitudinal frame member in the
area of the compressed-gas reservoirs with extreme
caution (avoiding damage to the compressed-gas
reservoirs). The compressed-gas system can be removed if absolutely necessary (carry out a subsequent leak test).
5.13.9 Access to the compressed-gas reservoirs

The openings in the brackets and cover plates providing access to the compressed-gas reservoir shutoff valves must not be obstructed under any circumstances by parts of the body or tool boxes.
The outlets of the fuses on the reservoir shut-off
valves must not be obstructed by parts of the body,
nor may flammable parts (electrical cables) be fitted
in this area.
There must be no hot parts present near the shut-off
valve fuses which could cause a fuse to blow (fit a
heat shield).
Access to the refuelling unit must not be impeded by
parts of the body or parts of the side underride
guard.
Ensure that the compressed-gas reservoirs are quick
and easy to remove for the purposes of repeat inspections of the compressed-gas reservoirs by the
relevant authority, i.e. that it is not necessary to remove the body nor any of its parts (crane supports,
compartments, side underride guard, etc.) in order
to remove the reservoirs.
5.13.10 Power take-off (NA) output

If equipment (hydraulic pumps, etc.) is operated using
the transmission-driven power take-off, bear in mind
that the minimum speed of the natural gas engine must
be 1,100 rpm at the rated speed of the power take-off.
There must be a gap of at least 10 mm between the

bolt heads or ends and the reservoirs and their members if bolts are required for mounting the body in
the area of the compressed-gas reservoir.
98
5 Damage prevention
5.14 Storing and delivering the vehicle
5.14
Storing and delivering the vehicle
Storage
To prevent damage when storing vehicles,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you maintain and
store the vehicle as described in the manufacturer's instructions ( page 62).
Delivery
To prevent damage to the vehicle or to repair any existing damage, Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be subjected to a full function check and a complete
visual inspection before it is handed over ( page 63).
99
6 Modifications to the basic vehicle

6.1 General
6.1
General
Risk of injury
No bolt connections relevant to safety, e.g. for wheel

location, steering and braking functions, may be altered.
For further information on bolted and welded connections, see Sections 3 "Planning of bodies"
( page 48) and 5 "Damage prevention" ( page 85)
and the Mercedes-Benz workshop information system (WIS) ( page 40).
When loosening bolt connections, make sure that

once the work is completed, the bolted connection
corresponds to the original state.
carried out by trained personnel.
The assemblies fitted during installation, bodywork,
assembly or conversion must comply with all applicable laws and directives, with the rules for accident
prevention and occupational health and safety as well
as the safety rules and bulletins issued by accident insurers.
100

6.2 Chassis frame material
6.2
Chassis frame material
For wheelbase and frame extensions, the material of the

extension element and reinforcing bracket must match
the standard chassis frame in quality and dimension.
See the respective tender drawings for the longitudinal
frame member dimensions.
Permissible
gross vehicle
weight
Longitudinal frame member

material
E 380 TM
E 500 TM
Actros (BM 93X)
all
Axor (BM 94X, 95X)
all
6,500 kg
all
7,500
8,600 kg
all
9,500 kg
Wheelbase
4,820 mm
Wheelbase
3,020
4,220 mm
9,500 kg under code CR2
all
10,500 kg
all
12,000 kg
Wheelbase
4,760
6,260 mm
Wheelbase
3,260
4,160 mm
13,500 kg
Wheelbase
4,760
6,260 mm
Wheelbase
3,260
4,160 mm
15,000 kg
Wheelbase
4,760
5,360 mm
Wheelbase
3,260
4,160 mm
all
Atego (BM 97X)
Econic
101

6.3 Drilling work on the vehicle frame
6.3
Drilling work on the vehicle frame
Holes in the longitudinal frame member
In special cases, holes can be made in the web in the longitudinal body member.
Do not drill holes:
in the upper and lower chord of the chassis frame
Distance "a":
A minimum of 45 mm from the inside edge of the
longitudinal frame member.
Holes in the rear end of the frame are an exception. However, holes must not, however, be drilled in sections with
a supporting function for the last axle or on parts fastened to the frame.
Distance between "b" holes:

A minimum of 50 mm
in the area of sectional changes to the longitudinal

frame member, such as frame drop and frame taper
No load may be applied to the centre of the web of the

longitudinal body members (diaphragm effect). If this is
unavoidable, make sure that there is a large area of support on both sides of the web.
at load application points (e.g. directly in the spring

supports)
Holes drilled in the upper and lower chords of the chassis at the factory must not be rebored (exception:
mounting holes for the end cross member). These holes
must not be used to fasten assemblies.
Maximum "d" hole diameter:

19 mm
After drilling, deburr and countersink all holes.
102

6.4 Welding work on the vehicle frame
Atego (BM 97X)
There must be no load application whatsoever on the
flange of the frame front end (Z-section) of the chassis
frame. However, if necessary, additional holes can be
made in the area between the Z-section ends and
300 mm towards the direction of travel for implementing
bolts. Make sure there is always a minimum distance of
30 mm to the outer edge of the Z-section. The department responsible can provide you with further information on this ( page 33).
6.4
Welding work on the vehicle frame
Welding work on the frame may only be carried out by

trained personnel.
The upper and lower chords of the chassis frame must
not be welded (except for wheelbase and frame extensions).
Grain-refined steels with a minimum yield point of

> 380 N/mm in TM quality and in the sheet thicknesses used for frame parts should not be preheated.
Recommended basic-jacket electrodes:
For E 500 TM: rod electrode DIN 8529
EY 4664 MoB.
For E 380 TM: rod electrode DIN 1913
E 5154 B10.
i
For further information on welded connections, see
Section 5 "Damage prevention" ( page 85) and the
Mercedes-Benz workshop information system
(WIS)( page 40).
Connect the earth terminal of the arc welder directly to

the part of the vehicle to be welded.
Use only completely dry lime-basic jacket electrodes. Electrode diameter 2.5 mm.
The maximum current may be 40 A per mm of electrode diameter.
Weld only with electrodes connected to the positive
pole of a direct current source. Always weld from
bottom to top.
MIG welding is permissible. Welding wire thickness 1
to 1.2 mm.
The yield point and tensile strength of the welding
material must be at least equal to that of the material
to be welded.
Welds must be ground down and reinforced with angular sections to prevent notching due to fusion penetration. Avoid welds in bends. A distance of at least
15 mm should be present between the weld and the
outer edges.
103

6.5 Reinforcements
6.5
Reinforcements
1 Frame insert
2 Reinforcing bracket
Shortening of wheelbase a > 55 mm
Wheelbase extension a > 55 mm
For modifications to the frame, inner or outer reinforcing brackets must be fitted.
Screw on or rivet the reinforcing bracket in such a
manner that it is flush with the ends of the upper and
lower chords. Use the existing holes in the longitudinal chassis frame member where possible.
On the frame web, there must be sufficient distance
between the upper and lower reinforcing brackets.
104

6.6 Brake system
6.6
Brake system
Risk of accident
6.6.1
Work carried out incorrectly on the brake system may

impair its function. This may lead to the failure of components or parts relevant to safety. You could thus
lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident, injuring yourself or others.
Compressed-air brake system
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only replace compressed-air brake lines completely with tested and approved plastic tubing (in accordance with DIN 74324).
Dimensions:
Measuring line
6x1
Control line
8x1
Accident prevention regulations (UVV) must be observed

when working on the vehicle.
Reservoir line and brake

hose
12x1.5
Reservoir line
16x2
i
After modifications, the function of the brake system
must be tested and approved at a technical testing
centre; otherwise the operating permit could be rendered invalid.
For further information, see Section 5 "Damage prevention" ( page 82).
Disc brakes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tested

line connections which have been approved for the type
of vehicle concerned.
The approved line connections are VOSS 232 for diameters of 8 mm or greater, and Schfer SDF for 6 mm lines.
For modifications to the compressed-air brake system
(e.g. in the case of modifications to the wheelbase or
frame):
only use tubing connections tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz and lines of the same dimensions
!
Do not impede cooling by attaching spoilers below
the bumper, additional hub caps or brake disc covers,
etc.
clean lines carefully before installation
i
The approved systems are mandrel-based. These systems have been tested for the operating conditions in
our lorries, and offer the necessary quality and service life.
!
Connectors that have not been approved are only accepted for use on separately fused auxiliary consumer circuits connected to connection 24 of the fourcircuit safety valve ( page 65).
105

6.6 Brake system
6.6.2
Routing lines
6.6.3
Lines must be routed at a safe distance from heat sources, sharp-edged and moving parts.
Bending radii for plastic lines
Tube
Wall thickness
Bending radius
mm
mm
mm
40
10
60
The use of plastic lines between air compressor and

compressed-air drier is not permissible in hydraulic systems and if the ambient temperature rises above 80 C.
12
1.5
60
15
1.5
90
16
100
Material
18
110
Use plastic straps for fastening.

The maximum permissible distance between loops is
500 mm.
Plastic lines: use polyamide PA 11 PHLY or

PA 12 PHLY complying with DIN 74324, DBL
6270.12.
The bending radii must not be smaller than the values

listed above.
Metal tubing: tombac complying with DIN 1755, material CuZn 20 F 33 or St35NBK DIN 50961,
DBL 4044.00.
If any additional lines need to be routed alongside brake
hoses, the approval of the department responsible is required ( page 33).
106

6.7 Modifications to the wheelbase
6.7
Modifications to the wheelbase
All model series

If modifications are to be made to the wheelbase, use
the chassis whose standard wheelbase is closest to the
wheelbase required.
Observe any changed values for the chassis weight and
turning circle. Mercedes-Benz cannot make any statement concerning the handling, braking and steering
characteristics of vehicles that have undergone extreme
modifications to the wheelbase.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that modifications to the
wheelbase be made by moving the rear axle assembly.
As no reinforcing bracket is required, there are advantages in terms of weight and cost. If necessary, use vehicles with an extended rear overhang.
Atego (BM 97X)
It is not possible to modify the wheelbase by moving the
rear axle in the longitudinal frame member.
6.7.1
Certificate of endorsement for

modifications to the wheelbase
All model series

It is not necessary to submit proposed modifications to
the wheelbase for a certificate of endorsement to be issued if these modifications do not reduce the shortest
standard wheelbase and if they do not extend the longest standard wheelbase of the corresponding vehicle.
However, these modifications must be carried out in accordance with these body/equipment mounting directives.
The certificate of endorsement is issued by the department responsible ( page 33).
File an application with 3 drawings of the modifications
and bodywork with the following details:
Position of the cut or new position of the rear axle assembly
Reinforcement measures
Propeller shaft train
Information about the conditions of use
A certificate of endorsement is required if:
the modifications produce a wheelbase longer than
the longest standard wheelbase or shorter than the
shortest standard wheelbase.
107

6.7.2
Atego (BM 97X)

A certificate of endorsement is required if the extension
is made outside of the following grid:
Modification to the wheelbase by

moving the rear axle assembly

Permissible gross
vehicle
weight (kg)
Wheelbase (mm)
Longitudinal
frame member
dimensions
(mm)
The holes in the longitudinal frame member are arranged

at equal distances of 50 mm apart. Within this grid, the
entire rear axle assembly can be moved after releasing
the securing elements; any missing holes are drilled.
6,500
3,020 4,220
220 x 65 x 5
7,500
8,600
3,020 4,220
4,820
220 x 65 x 5
220 x 65 x 6
9,500
3,020
3,320 4,220
4,820
3,320 4,820 under
code F04
All wheelbases under code CR2
220 x 65 x 5
220 x 65 x 5.5
220 x 65 x 7
220 x 65 x 6
The position of the cross member must be adjusted to

match the new position of the rear axle, by fitting additional cross members if necessary. Existing frame reinforcements must be adjusted in the same way.
10,500
3,020 4,220
4,820
220 x 65 x 6
220 x 65 x 7
12,000
Low frames
3,620 4,220
4,820 5,420
220x65x6
220x65x7
12,000
3,560
3,560 under code
CR2
4160
4760 6260
260 x 65 x 5.5
260 x 65 x 6
260 x 65 x 6
260 x 65 x 7
13,500
3560
3,560 under code
CR2
4,160
4,760 6,260
260 x 65 x 5.5
260 x 65 x 6
260 x 65 x 6
260 x 65 x 7
15,000
3,560 4,160
4,760 6,260
260 x 65 x 6
260 x 65 x 7
220 x 65 x 6
Atego (BM 97X)

It is not possible to modify the wheelbase by moving the
rear axle in the longitudinal frame member.
i
For further information, see Sections 3.5.1 "Bolted
connections" ( page 48) and 6.3 "Drilling work on
the frame" ( page 102).
108

6.7.3
Modification to the wheelbase by cutting the longitudinal frame member
Position the separation points such that no existing

holes in the longitudinal frame member are cut.
Cutting points (examples)
Align the chassis horizontally before cutting the longitudinal frame member.
Support the frame.
Required moment of resistance for mounting frame:

Up to the maximum standard wheelbase:
see the tables and diagrams in Section 7 "Types of
bodies" ( page 180).
If above the maximum standard wheelbase, increase
the moment of resistance by a minimum of 15 %.
109

Modifications to the wheelbase are not permitted on vehicles with Telligent stability control (code BB7).
Frame cuts are not permitted near the:
load application points
axle guide, axle suspension
transmission mounting point
sectional changes (frame drop, frame taper)
In accordance with the position of the frame cut, adjust
and weld the reinforcing bracket to the existing frame insert.
Finally, bolt the reinforcing bracket to the chassis frame
and frame extension.
After modifications to the wheelbase, reinforce the chassis with a continuous mounting frame.
Atego (BM 97X)
Shortening of wheelbase
The wheelbase can be modified easily and cost-effectively by separating the connection between the frame
head (Z-section) and the longitudinal frame member (Usection).
Loosen bolted or rivet connections between the frame
header and the longitudinal frame member and shorten
the longitudinal frame member (U-section) to the required size. The wheelbase can be shortened in steps of
50 mm. Drill any required holes in the longitudinal frame
member. Rivet connections that have been removed can
be replaced with bolted connections.
1 Frame insert
Shortening of wheelbase a > 55 mm
i
For further information, see Sections 3.5.1 "Bolted
connections" ( page 48), 6.3 "Drilling work on the
frame" ( page 102) and 6.6.5 "Permission to make
modifications to the wheelbase" ( page 107).
110

Wheelbase extension
All model series
On the longitudinal frame members, the individual segments are indicated with consecutive, stamped letters.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you make the separation point at letter "C" ( page 112). This ensures that
none of the existing holes in the longitudinal frame member will be affected by the cut.
Bolt the reinforcing bracket (strength minimum of 5 mm)
to the chassis frame and frame extension in accordance
with the location of the frame cut. The overlap with the
chassis frame must cover at least 3 hole patterns.
Wheelbase extension a > 55 mm
111

Separation point on the longitudinal frame member
1 Mounting frame
2 Chassis frame
3 Frame separation point (front weld)
5 Frame separation point (rear weld)
Frame sections for extending the frame are available on
request.
Longitudinal frame member:
Web height 220 mm MB no. 971 311 49 09 and 49 10
Web height 260 mm MB no. 974 311 32 09 and 32 10
Enquiries should be addressed to:
Fax:
Postal address:
0032 5126 1300

SADEF
Bruggesteenweg 60
B-8830 Gits/Belgium
After modifications to the wheelbase, reinforce the chassis with a continuous mounting frame.
Required moment of resistance for mounting frame:
Up to the maximum standard wheelbase: see the tables and diagrams in Section 7 "Types of bodies"
( page 180).
Above the maximum standard wheelbase:
Increase the moment of resistance by a minimum of
15 %.
Align the chassis horizontally before cutting the longitudinal frame member.
Support the frame.
Weld or bolt the auxiliary subframe with the exterior
bracket.
112

6.7.4
Propeller shafts
Intermediate shaft
A correctly-designed propeller shaft train prevents the

development of noise and vibrations. If possible, only
use parts tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Propeller shaft
a
b
Operating length
Permissible shaft length
Operating length
If modifications have been made to the wheelbase,

arrange and dimension the propeller shafts to the
specifications of a comparable standard vehicle
(same model and same or similar wheelbase).
The diameter and wall thickness of the propeller
shaft tube must correspond to the standard propeller shaft.
If necessary, use several propeller shafts with intermediate bearings.
113

Types of angular bend
All-wheel-drive vehicles
For modifications to the wheelbase, the propeller
shaft train can only be modified downstream of the
transfer case.
The wheelbase can only be shortened to the length
of the shortest standard wheelbase.
N41.00-2014-00
The angular offsets must be the same at both universal joints (1 = 1). They must not exceed 6. If the
angular offset is greater than 6 or there is a flange
angle error (1 <> 2), this can cause vibrations in
the power train. This compromises the service life of
the assemblies and can cause damage.
Balance propeller shafts before installation.
Propeller shafts packed with foam material are used.
Modifications outside the limit values are to be avoided.
If Mercedes-Benz deem necessary, they will issue a certificate of endorsement for possible exceptions
( page 33). Drawings of the intended propeller shaft
modification with the exact data on dimensions (shaft
length and angular offset) must be submitted.
114

6.8 Modifications to the frame
6.8
Modifications to the frame
On the semitrailer tractor chassis, modifications to

the standard frame overhang are not permissible.
The maximum permissible axle loads must not be exceeded, while the minimum front axle load must be
exceeded.
Rear underride guard: fastened in the same way as
on a standard vehicle.
Extend the mounting frame to the end of the frame.
Check the trailer connections for correct operation.
6.8.1
Frame extension
So that the rear frame overhang has a sufficient torsional stability, the distance from cross member to
cross member must not exceed 1,200 mm.
For operation with single-axle trailers (centre-axle

trailers), the following information is required for a
check and a certificate of endorsement:
Vehicle
Vehicle identification number.
Position of centre of gravity of the body, length
of body and overall length of the vehicle.
Distance from the centre of the rear axle up to
the coupling point.
If there is a crane mounted at the rear end of the
vehicle, its weight and centre of gravity of the
rear axle.
Centre-axle trailer
Gross vehicle weight
Static noseweight.
H/L ratio of the height of the overall centre of
gravity above the road surface (H) to the distance from the coupling point to the centre of
the axle (L).
1 Maximum 1,200 mm
115

6.8.2
Standard chassis frame extension
The end cross member can be moved up to approximately 250 mm towards the rear axle. A gusset plate
must extend at least about 350 400 mm beyond
the welding point towards the front of the vehicle.
For frame extensions greater than 250 mm, fit an additional cross member. Also fit a standard end cross
member if the existing end cross member has not
been moved to the rear. For this type of construction, the towing weight entered in the vehicle documents remains the same.
Permissible towing weight (A)
Do not refer to the diagram for vehicle use with a

centre-axle trailer. If the maximum frame overhang is
exceeded here, approval of the department responsible is required ( page 33).
Reinforce the end cross member in the mounting
frame and the end cross member in the chassis
frame with a connecting plate.
Connect the mounting frame between the front rear
spring bracket and the end of the frame rigidly with
the chassis frame.
Install a diagonal cross in the mounting frame.
i
Observe additional notes in Section 4 "Technical
threshold values for planning" ( page 67).
6.8.3
Frame shortening
If the end of the frame is shortened, the end cross member must be placed at the (new) frame end.
If necessary, replace the spring bracket cross member
with the end cross member.
R = wheelbase
= overhang
If the maximum frame overhang is exceeded, the
permissible towing weight specified in the vehicle
registration document must be reduced. See the diagram. The frame overhang must be reinforced accordingly.
116

6.8.4
End cross member
Bolted connection
An end cross member must always be installed, even

if no trailer towing is intended.
The end cross member is fastened as it is in standard

production.
If a trailer coupling is installed, the necessary reinforcements must be present. Keep a distance of at
least 350 mm to the next cross member.
Maintain the number, diameter and strength of the

bolts.
If the end cross member replaces the rear spring

bracket cross member, the rear spring brackets
must remain securely fastened. Refer to
section 3.5.1 "Bolted connections" ( page 48).
1 Longitudinal chassis frame member

2 Cross member
3 Frame extension
4 Gusset or reinforcing bracket
5 End cross member
2 Cross member
3 Frame extension
5 End cross member
117

Riveted connection
The end cross member is fastened as it is in standard
production.
The rivets can be replaced with flange head bolts of

the next size (strength class10.9) and self-locking
nuts.

2 Cross member
3 Frame extension
5 End cross member
118

6.9 Attachments and additional equipment
6.9
Attachments and additional equipment
Risk of accident
The use of non-approved parts, assemblies or conversion parts and accessories can jeopardise the safety
of the vehicle.
Approval from official test centres or official approbations cannot rule out safety risks.
Country-specific legislation, directives and registration regulations must be observed.
6.9.1
Fastening to the chassis frame
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of flange nuts

and bolts in accordance with Mercedes-Benz standards (MBN) 10105 and 13023, strength class 10.9,
pitch 1.5 mm, self-locking nuts.
Use existing holes.
Adjust the number of bolts to the load.
6.9.2
Wheel chocks
Fastening
Rattle-free in suitable holder.
Secured against loss.
Easily accessible.
6.9.3
Mudguards and wheel arches
The distance between the tyre and the mudguard or

wheel housing must be sufficient even when snow or
anti-skid chains are fitted, with the suspension fully
compressed (including any twist). Observe data on
dimensions in the tender drawings.
If the chassis features holes as standard intended for
the mudguard brackets, these are to be used.
Semitrailer tractor vehicle:
The mudguards are to be fitted in such a way that
their top is lower than the surface of the semitrailer
coupling.
Maintain the minimum distance between the top
frame edge and the top of the mudguards.
For dimensions, see the tender drawings.
6.9.4
Spare wheel
Fastening
According to the chassis drawing, under the frame,
at the side on the frame or on the bodywork.
Ease of access and handling.
Side fastening
Fit the retainer and assembly close to a cross member. Do not fit any additional cross members.
Double-secured against loss.
Fit the reinforcement plate inside on the frame web.

No load may be applied to the centre of the web of the
longitudinal body members (diaphragm effect). If this is
unavoidable, make sure that there is a large area of support on both sides of the web.
119

6.9.5
Front underride guard
All class N2 and N3 vehicles put into circulation must

comply with EC Directive 2000/40/EC (front underrun
protection) in order to conform with Directive 70/156/
EEC, Annex II (type-approval of motor vehicles). Class
N2G and N3G off-road vehicles and vehicles whose intended operation is not compatible with the regulations
concerning front underride guards are exempt. The intended operation of a vehicle is to a great extent determined by the bodywork, so that the structure, design
and equipment of the chassis must be carefully considered both with and without the front underride guard. It
is not possible to retrofit a front underride guard on the
Actros/Axor and Econic models. Mercedes-Benz recommends that the approval and intended use be clarified
with the authorities responsible beforehand.
120

6.9.6
Rear underride guard
In Germany, an underride guard is required under Section 32b of the national road traffic licensing regulations
(STVZO) if:
the distance from the end of the vehicle to the rearmost rear axle is more than 1,000 mm
on the unladen vehicle, the height of the chassis or
main parts of the bodywork above the road surface
exceed 700 mm across the entire vehicle width
Semitrailer tractor vehicles, work machines and vehicles
whose intended use would not be possible due to the
presence of an underride guard are exempt from the
above requirement.
If an underride guard is required, it must comply with EC
Directive 70/221/EEC.
Wherever possible, the underride guard is to be installed
at the end of the vehicle.
Installation measurements:
The underride guard installed at the factory complies

with EC Directive 70/221/EEC. No modifications are
permitted. If modifications are unavoidable, you must
first consult the registration office responsible.
Maximum height of underride guard (unladen vehicle) above road surface: 550 mm.
Maximum width: equal to the width of rear axle (outer side of the tyre).
Minimum width: on each side 100 mm less than the
width of the rear axle.
These dimensions are to be based on the widest axle.
Minimum section height of cross member: 100 mm.
Minimum curvature radius of edge: 2.5 mm.
121

a = rear axle width

P1, P2, P3 = load application point
Check the strength of the underride guard and its
mounting.
On an unladen vehicle, load points P1, P2 and P3
horizontally one after the other.
Minimum load:
Points P1 and P3: 12.5 % of the technically permissible gross vehicle weight, maximum 2,500 kg.
Point P2: 50 % of the technically permissible gross
vehicle weight, maximum 10,000 kg.
At maximum deformation, the distance from the end of
the body to the end of the underride guard at the load
points may not exceed 400 mm.
The maximum deformation of the Mercedes-Benz underride guard may not exceed 60 mm.
122

6.9.7
Side underride guard
Pursuant to EC Directive 89 /297 /EEC, vehicles with a

permissible gross vehicle weight in excess of 3.5 t are required to be equipped with side underride guards.
Semitrailer tractor vehicles, work machines and vehicles
whose intended use would not be possible due to the
presence of an underride guard are exempt from the
above requirement.
In the side underride guard, components such as
battery compartments, air tanks, fuel tank, lights, reflectors, spare wheels and tool boxes may be fitted if
the specified clearances are maintained. Brake,
compressed-air or hydraulic lines and other parts
must not be fastened to the side underride guard.
The function and accessibility of all assemblies on
the vehicle must not be impaired.
Where possible, fit the underride guard from the
front to the rear continuously.
Adjacent parts may overlap. The overlapping edge
must face down or to the rear.
6.9.8
Compressor installation
Actros (BM 93X), Axor (BM95X)

Arrange compressor brackets in such a way that the load
application covers a large area on the chassis frame; use
a pressure distribution plate if necessary.
Do not attach the compressor brackets in the middle
of the longitudinal body member web (diaphragm effect).
The reinforcing bracket must have a minimum side
measurement of 80 mm on the lower frame chord.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use material
E 500 TM (at least St 52).
For compressors with a weight > 50 kg, reinforcement
measures are required, depending on the installation position:
Compressor bracket lies near to a vehicle cross
member (i.e. the compressor bracket is bolted to
the cross member gusset).

An additional bracket must be fitted on the longitudinal
body member to balance the upper semitrailer bracket.
i
Adjust the material thickness of the semitrailer bracket.
Platform truck:
No measures necessary.
123

Only part of the compressor bracket lies near a vehicle cross member (i.e. the compressor bracket
can only be partly bolted to the cross member gusset).
Platform truck:
For torque support, install an additional standard cross
member or as an alternative, 2 vertically-upright panels,
connected by an L bracket to the longitudinal body member.
Material thickness: minimum of 8 mm
Material: E 500 TM

A reinforcing bracket must be fitted underneath on the
longitudinal body member.
Platform truck:
Reinforcing brackets with a material thickness of at least
8 mm must be installed both above and below on the longitudinal frame member, and extending at least 300 mm
beyond the compressor bracket.
Compressor bracket lies outside the gusset of the
vehicle cross member.
1 Attachment to the compressor bracket

2 Chassis longitudinal member

There must be a reinforcing bracket (material thickness
of at least 8 mm) and extending from the centre of the
cross member immediately in front, to at least the centre
of the cross member immediately behind.
124

6.10 Cab
6.10
Cab
Modifications to the cab must not have a negative effect

on the function and strength of assemblies and control
units or on the strength of supporting parts.
The tilting cab must not be fixed rigidly to the bodywork.
Atego (BM 97X)
If the tilting cab is fixed rigidly to the bodywork, a
certificate of endorsement from the department responsible is required ( page 33).
If additional parts are installed or removed, a torsion
bar with increased aligning torque may be necessary
on the short cab with three-point bearing without tilting hydraulics. If the weight of the bodies amounts to
more than 50 kg, a four-point bearing with tilting hydraulics and a certificate of endorsement from the
department responsible are required ( page 33).
6.10.1 Adaptation of a crew cabin/crewcab in

the short cab (code F07)
In addition to the bolt connection of the cab rear wall

flange, there is a bolt connection on the cab longitudinal
member.
Fastening crewcab longitudinal body member
Atego (BM 97X)

Scope of delivery from the factory:
The following detailed scope of delivery under code FV4
(cab prepared with flange) and under code F31 (reinforced tilting hydraulics) can be ordered from the factory.
This concerns a flange on the cab rear wall, to which a
cab extension can be adapted. Cabs with flange preparation do not have the rear wall that is usually located in
this position. The following drawings show the scope of
the cab and the adaptation connection of the cab rear
wall flange:
1 Securing bolts
125

6.10 Cab
The total mass of the completely equipped cab when it
is ready for use must not exceed 1,300 kg. The mass of
the standard-equipped short basic cab (without items of
optional equipment) is 650 + x kg, the mass of the basic
scope of the deliverable body is 595 kg. The overall centre of gravity must not exceed a distance of 1,500 mm
from the cab's pivot point.
Details of assembly
See the drawings for the exact position of the bolted
connections. Use M8 or M12 flange head bolts each in
accordance with the designation and with the corresponding length; tightening torque 26 Nm for M8 and
82 Nm for M12 (Md for =0.085). In each of the upper
two corners there must be at least 6 bolt connections in
the indicated areas, and in each of the lower two corners
at least 4 bolt connections. For the allocation and
number of bolts, see the corresponding descriptions in
the drawing.
If a version different to the cab extension planned at the
factory is adapted to the flange, this should be possible
after the responsible department has carried out a check
and received positive results ( page 33). Significant
documents (dimensions, structures [sectional elements,
materials], measurements including additional measurements with centres of gravity, adaptation of the cab suspension, information about the interior, use) are required
for the check.
A cab extension requires a certificate of endorsement
from the department responsible ( page 33).
i
For further information, see the Mercedes-Benz
body/equipment manufacturer system (MB-AS) at:
http://abh-infoportal.mercedes-benz.com
http://bb-infoportal.mercedes-benz.com
The docking ring must be sealed and the anti-corrosion

protection must be fully applied.
Cab tilting hydraulics
During assembly of the rear cab suspension, particular
care must be taken during the new assembly of this
equipment. This includes the relevant cab lock:
The attachment to the connecting flange installed at
the factory in Wrth must be identical to that used as
standard.
Both locks must open synchronously (->Weber hydraulics, cab release control valve: signal must come
simultaneously).
The spring strut must be aligned at the correct angle
(observe the track), otherwise distortions occur.
126

6.11 Seats and bench seat
6.11
Seats and bench seat
Risk of injury
Modifications to or work incorrectly carried out on a

restraint system (seat belt and its anchorages, belt
tensioners, airbags) or their wiring could result in incorrect functioning of the restraint systems. Airbags
or belt tensioners, for example, could then fail in accidents with sufficient deceleration or could be activated unintentionally. You should therefore never modify
the restraint systems.
Country-specific instructions and guidelines must be
observed.
The retrofitting of original seats and/or bench seats is
only permitted and possible if the necessary pre-wiring
exists in the vehicle, such as suitable floor assembly, reinforced cab/cab suspension. For all other seat retrofittings, corresponding evidence (belt checks, tensile
tests) is required as part of an endorsement check carried out by the department responsible ( page 33).
127

6.12 Retarder
6.12
Retarder
If a retarder is retrofitted in the transmission or in the

propeller shaft train, a certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible ( page 33).
Certificates of endorsement are not generally issued;
they are in principle restricted to specific particular vehicle model designations and wheelbases.
Due to the additional weight of the retarder, check

the load distribution and make sure the permissible
axle loads are maintained. Check the location of the
centre of gravity of the body and the distance between rear axle and semitrailer coupling point, then
adjust if necessary.
Installation only in vehicles with a sufficiently dimensioned electrical system (alternators and batteries
with sufficient capacity). Ensure the retarder has a
sufficient earth connection.
Ensure sufficient freedom of movement.
Only secure the retarder in the propeller shaft train
to the web of the chassis frame using brackets with
silent blocks.
Protect lines from heat with appropriate insulation.
The maximum permissible temperature for polyamide compressed-air lines is 80 C.
During retarder fitting to the transmission and bodywork with a frame/floor system /with a mounting
frame lower than 80 mm, the plastic lines must be
replaced with steel lines or moved outside the chassis frame in the retarder area.
It is only permitted to retrofit a retarder on vehicles with
a programmable special module (PSM). Corresponding
preparations must be made at the factory ( page 150).
A Interior mountings
B Exterior mountings
The retarder must be connected to the PSM and corresponding programming must be carried out. Further information is issued by the department responsible
( page 33).
1 Silent block
The installation drawings must show the following information:
Location of the retarder in the vehicle
Propeller shaft angle
For vehicles with a Telligent automatic gearshift, it is

only possible to retrofit a retarder after a particular point
in the production process. Further information is issued
by the department responsible ( page 33).
Length of the propeller shaft
128

6.13 Leading axle/trailing axle
6.13
The volume of compressed air for the rear axle brake

circuit must be increased accordingly.
Leading axle/trailing axle
Risk of accident
Fitting an additional axle on vehicles with Telligent

stability control may result in the system not functioning correctly and failing.
The vehicle could skid, the driver could lose control of
the vehicle as a result and cause an accident.
It is not permitted to fit an additional axle on vehicles
with Telligent stability control.
A certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible when retrofitting a leading or trailing
axle ( page 33).
Before fitting, check the following:
An anti-roll bar is required on the drive axle.
Additional frame reinforcements must be installed.
Modifications to the load application points (e.g. axle
suspension, spring supports, etc.) are not permitted.
The minimum front axle load must be observed if the
permissible gross vehicle weight is increased.
The maximum permissible axle loads must not be exceeded.
The brake control must be modified accordingly for

vehicles with traction control on the leading or trailing axle.
On vehicles with acceleration skid control (ASR),
suitable measures must be taken to prevent the
leading or trailing axle in ASR operation from braking.
The specified braking effect of the auxiliary brake
must still be achieved after the load is increased.
The air compressor output must be sufficient.
Adjust the load-sensitive brake pressure control and
the overload protection device.
Mount the leading or trailing axle on the chassis
frame such that the longitudinal and lateral forces
can be absorbed safely without transferring them to
the drive axle.
Ensure there is a sufficient distance from the propeller shaft.
Where possible, use a uniform suspension system
with axle load compensation.
Give preference to vehicles with increased permissible front axle load.
The braking effect of the service and parking brakes

on the leading axle or trailing axle must be matched
to the standard brake system (brake cylinder, linkage adjustment lever length, brake pad/lining).
Larger brake cylinders may be required on the front
axle.
On vehicles with the Telligent brake system /ABS,
the brakes of the leading/trailing axle must be coupled to the brakes of the rear axle on their respective
sides and, if necessary, their brake pressure is to be
reduced for ABS operation.
The legally specified response and threshold times
must not be exceeded.
129

6.14 Retrofitting an automatic transmission
6.14
Retrofitting an automatic transmission
Risk of accident
Retrofitting an automatic transmission on vehicles

with the Telligent brake system (BS) may result in
the system not functioning correctly and failing. It
may cause malfunctions in the electronics and
change the braking characteristics of the vehicle.
It is forbidden to retrofit an automatic transmission on
vehicles with the Telligent brake system (BS).
Retrofitting an automatic transmission requires a certificate of endorsement from the department responsible
( page 33).
130

6.15 Electrical system/electronics
6.15
Electrical system/electronics
Risk of accident

The integration as software modules means that the corresponding control units no longer apply. Newly added
functions are:
Central data memory
Gateway function
The base module is located behind the footwell trim on
the co-driver's side.
from functioning correctly. Since the electronic systems are networked, this might also affect systems
that have not been modified.
1 Base module catch
Actros (BM 93X)

A new electrical system /electronics networking concept called "KontAct" will be used in the new Actros series. Three central electronic units control the chassis
and assembly-related functions.
The base module using the "KontAct" networking principle is the central electronic unit, connected through different CAN-Bus systems to the control units of all
electronic systems. The base module contains software
functions (virtual control units) for these systems:
Communications computer
Radio remote control
Maintenance system
Anti-theft alarm system
131

Front module
The front module is the central electronic management

system in the front part of the vehicle. Via the frame
CAN, it is networked with the base module and redundantly with the rear module. The front module assumes
the functional range in connection with the modules or
assemblies of the front part of the vehicle.
Headlamp range control
Temperature display, steering
Horn
Inter-axle and lateral locks of the front and rear axles
Maintenance system
The front module is located between the doorway and
the longitudinal frame member on the co-driver's side.
The rear module is attached on the inside of the righthand longitudinal frame member. The rear module is located directly above the rear axle on vehicles with one
rear axle, or between the two rear axles on vehicles with
two rear axles.
i
The connector lead between the base module, front
module and rear module must not be cut through
and/or extended.
If necessary, the respective module must be moved and
the cables on the relevant consumer must be lengthened. The Mercedes-Benz Service Network provides a
range of cable sets (extension element, Y-connector
lead).
Rear module
The rear module is the central electronic management
system in the rear part of the vehicle. Via the frame CAN,
the rear module is networked with the base module and
redundantly with the front module. The rear module assumes the functional range in connection with the modules or assemblies of the rear part of the vehicle.
Rear exterior lighting
Tipper/on-board computer
Maintenance system
Level control and roll control
132

6.15.1 Vehicle earth
6.15.2 Tapping cables to control units
The earth concept from the previous Actros was adopted

in the new series.
It is forbidden to tap cables to control units. The control

unit could malfunction. Necessary information, such as
a tachograph signal, can be requested via the programmable special module, see also Section 6.23 "Programmable special module (PSM)" ( page 150).
The earth return of the electric consumers does not take

place via the vehicle frame (voltage-free frame), but via
wiring from the earth point to the power distributor.
!
Earth return via the vehicle frame can cause damage
to the engine and transmission components.
If the mounting frame of a body is used for earth return,
the mounting frame must be connected correctly to the
earth point on the longitudinal frame member to prevent
damage.
133

6.16 Power supply auxiliary consumers
6.16
Power supply auxiliary consumers
Risk of accident

from functioning correctly. Since the electronic systems are networked, this might also affect systems
that have not been modified.
6.16.1 Electrical consumers up to 10 amps

Actros (BM 93X)
The X7 cable plug in the base module can be used for the
power supply to retrofitted consumers.
i
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you connect the
consumers in accordance with the wiring diagrams
( pages152 158). Observe the pin assignment in
the cable plug.
If electrical consumers are retrofitted, observe the following:

On request, a 12-V trailer power socket (adapter)
and batteries and alternators with higher power output are available for delivery from the factory.
Before working on the electrical system: switch off
all consumers and disconnect the negative terminals
() from the batteries. Reconnect batteries only
when all loosened cables are connected.
Do not connect any additional consumers to fuses
already assigned.
Do not connect any additional cables to existing cables (e.g. using insulation piercing connecting devices (IPCDs).
Provide adequate fusing to protect electrical consumers.
A voltage transformer must supply power for 12 V
appliances. Power supply from a single battery is not
permitted.
If inductive resistors are retrofitted to towing and
trailer vehicles (e.g. solenoid valves), the freewheeling current when switching off must be conducted
along a defined route to prevent interference being
transmitted to other cables by voltage peaks. For
this reason, only solenoid valves with integrated diodes should be used; on manually-operated switches, the freewheeling current must be conducted
through a diode.
134

Axor (BM 94X, 95X)
Econic
The cable plug in the electrical equipment compartment

(behind the base module) can be used for the power supply to retrofitted consumers.
The cable plug (X83 /3) in the electrical equipment compartment (behind the base module) can be used for the
power supply to retrofitted consumers.

( page 138). Observe the pin assignment in the cable plug.

( page 139). Observe the pin assignment in the cable plug.
Cable plug (1) in the electrical equipment compartment
Cable plug X83/3 in the electrical equipment compartment
135

6.16.2 Explanations of cable plug
(pin assignment)
The X7.1 plug in the cab/chassis interface is intended
for registering the most important signals to a body connection. The interface is accessible via the front end and
from the vehicle interior.
Axor (BM 94X, 95X), Atego (BM 97X)
Pin assignment number in
the cable plug
Terminal
Maximum current draw
Pin 1
T 30
10 A
Pin 2
T 31
10 A
Pin 3
T 15
2A
Pin 4
T 58
2A
Pin 5
T D+
2A
Pin 6
Reversing lamp
2A
Pin 7
T W max.
10 mA
Pin 8
V signal max.
10 mA
Pin 9
TCO additional recorder
Pin 10
TCO additional recorder
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Load compartment light, minus ()1)
Pin 14
Load compartment light, plus (+)1)
Pin 15
PSM coupling remote control1)
Pin 16
PSM coupling remote control1)
Pin 17
Pin 18
1) Pin assignment depending on vehicle's equipment
136

Econic
10
11
12
Pin assignment number in X83/3 cable plug

X83/3 plug connector current draw and vehicle signals
Pin assignment
number
Terminal
Maximum current
draw
(amps)
Cable colour
Vehicle earth for body manufacturer control system
15 A
2.5 br
Terminal 15 selected via relay
20 A
2.5 bla
Terminal 30 direct B+
15 A
2.5 rd
T 58
3A
0.75 gr/ye
Reversing lamp
7A
0.75 wh/rd
Brake lamp
7A
0.75 wh/rd
Not assigned
Frequent-stop brake
3A
0.75 rd /gn/wh
Not assigned
10
Not assigned
11
Earth transmission control module for X83/ 2-15/

9 (no additional load permissible)
0.75 br/ye
12
Terminal 15 of F16-NA fuse and GGVS /ADR
0.75 pu /gr
137

6.16.3 Wiring diagram (current draw up to
10 amps)
Axor (BM 94X, 95X)
Wire designations
Example:
Wire designation 1.5 blu /ye
Wire cross-section 1.5 = 1.5 mm
Wiring diagram
Cable colours
blu
blue
br
brown
ye
yellow
gr
grey
or
orange
rd
red
bla
black
wh
white
Base colour blu = blue

Identifying colour ye = yellow
Explanations
Plug connections
A1 /A2
Module
A31/A32
Relay
X7
Plug connector
Consumer connection in
the cab
Consumer connection on
the chassis frame
138

Econic
Wire designations
Wiring diagram
Example:
Wire designation 1.5 blu /ye
Wire cross-section 1.5 = 1.5 mm
Cable colours
blu
blue
br
brown
ye
yellow
gr
grey
or
orange
rd
red
bla
black
wh
white
Base colour blu = blue

Identifying colour ye = yellow
Explanations
Plug connections
A1 /A2
Module
A31/A32
Relay
X7
Plug connector (interface

between cab/chassis
frame)
X83/3
Cable plug in the electrical equipment compartment
Consumer connection in
the cab
Consumer connection on
the chassis frame
139

6.16.4 Electrical consumers above 10 amps
Risk of fire
There is a risk of fire if the cables are overloaded.

Electrical consumers with a high current draw must
not be supplied or connected via the base module under any circumstances, as the wiring or main electric
cable (16 mm) can become overloaded.
For ADR/GGVS vehicles transporting hazardous
goods:
Observe the ADR/GGVS instructions and countryspecific laws and regulations.
Actros (BM 93X)
The power distributor on the longitudinal frame member
in the battery compartment is designed for the supply of
power to electrical consumers with a high current draw.
On vehicles with an integral rear, the power distributor is
on the support strut of the side panel in the area of the
fuel tank.
The power distributor must be retrofitted with an adapter box for the additional power supply (after-sales service document number for retrofitting WIS no. AN54.18W-2000MP). The adapter compartment is available from
our Service Network. Several adapter boxes can be connected. The combined current draw of the additional
consumers must not exceed 200 A.
Power supply for auxiliary consumers in the cab:
The basic wiring for electrical equipment in the cab can
be obtained under sales code ED9. ED9 includes a connector bolt above the base module which is to be used
for the connections.
!
The terminal screws in the base module must not be
used.
140

Explanations of cable plug (pin assignment)

Pin number
Terminal
Maximum current draw (amps)
Cable colour
58
Not assigned
30
10
Not assigned
54
Not assigned
Reversing lamp
Not assigned
0.05
Not assigned
D+
Not assigned
31
10
Not assigned
V signal
0.05
Not assigned
15
Not assigned
141

Axor (BM 94X, 95X), Atego (BM 97X), Econic
Fuse box 4 on the longitudinal frame member in the
battery compartment is designed for the supply of power
to electrical consumers with a high current draw
( page 143).
ADR/ GGVS vehicles
On ADR /GGVS vehicles transporting hazardous goods,
the earth connections of the electrical consumers (delivery pumps, etc.) must be connected to the distributor
sockets provided. Battery cutoff switch 1 and the current limiter for tachograph, anti-theft alarm system and
the electronic switches are also located in the battery
compartment ( page 143).
142

Connection of electrical auxiliary consumers,
Axor (BM 94X, 95X), Atego (BM 97X)
1 Battery cutoff switch (ADR/GGVS)

2 Distributor socket earth connections (ADR/GGVS)
3 Fuse
4 Fuse box power supply (+)

5 Switch (ADR/GGVS)
143

Connection of electrical auxiliary consumers,
Econic
1 Battery cutoff switch (ADR/GGVS)

2 Distributor socket earth connections (ADR/GGVS)
3 Fuse
4 Fuse box power supply (+)

5 Switch (ADR/GGVS)
144

Power supply for auxiliary consumers in the cab or on
the chassis frame.
Connector plate, Econic
Non ADR/ GGVS vehicles

Power supply is only permissible via a connector
plate. Pay attention to the connections.
Connector plate, Axor (BM 94X, 95X)
1 Earth connection ()
2 Power supply (+)
1 Earth connection ()
2 Power supply (+)
145

6.16.5 Installation of lighting
If lighting equipment can be covered by more than 50%
when moving vehicle parts (e.g. loading tailgate) are in
operation, the vehicle must be safeguarded accordingly.
An appropriate note must be attached at a point where
it can easily be seen by the driver of the vehicle.
Vehicles with an overall length of over 6 m and registration after 1.10.1994 must be equipped with side marker
lamps in accordance with Directive 91/663 /EEC. From
this date onwards, there are branch-off lines on the wiring harness to connect the side marker lamps and suitable tail lamps.
Installation of rotating signal lights

Econic
Rotating signal lights can be fitted to the body manufacturer attachment or on the roof of the cab. The electrical
preparatory work is done on the inside of the cab as
standard.
Once the interior lights have been removed, the cable
ends can be accessed. It is not necessary to remove the
roof lining.
Installation of rotating signal lights
The entire lighting system is monitored for individual

bulb failure. To connect additional lights, use the wiring
diagrams described in this section.
i
Comply with all national laws, guidelines and vehicle
registration regulations.
1 Installation position for rotating signal lights

2 Cable equipment for rotating signal lights
146

6.16.6 Electrical wiring
Axor (BM 94X, 95X), Atego (BM 97X), Econic
When extending electrical cables, observe the following:
Only use FLR cables with the same cross-section and
same base and identifying colour as the standard
wires.
The cables must be enclosed within an insulating
hose (a corrugated hose on ADR/GGVS vehicles
transporting hazardous goods).
At the ends of the wire, only use tested connectors
which have been approved for the type of vehicle
concerned.
Electrical cables must only be connected with tested
connectors, which have been approved for the type
of vehicle concerned, via junction boxes or extension
leads intended for this purpose.
Cables for ABS can only be extended with tested cable sets which have been approved for the type of vehicle concerned.
1 Corrugated hose (example)
i
Refer to the operation instructions for repairing and
lengthening cable sets. These are available from the
Mercedes-Benz body/equipment manufacturer system (MB-AS) ( page 40).
147

6.16.7 Cable routing preparation
X85 interface
Econic
The following has been provided for cable routing:
2 NW23 corrugated pipes from chassis to cab.
Empty pipe with feeder wire from the electrical
equipment compartment to the centre console.
X83 interface see wiring diagram.
X84 interface, left-hand lights.
X85 interface, right-hand lights.
X84 interface
148

6.16.8 Anti-theft alarm system
For vehicles with the anti-theft alarm system, it is possible to monitor the body or connect an external motion
detector. The existing earth bridge on the A44.2 connector in the electrical equipment compartment must be
separated accordingly and replaced with supply lines to
the box-type body.
149

6.16.9 Programmable special module (PSM)
The interaction of the various control modules is referred
to collectively by the term integrated electronic system
(IES).
The individual components are no longer connected by
wires in an analogue system; they are connected digitally with the aid of a high-speed Controller Area Network
(HS-CAN bus).
Cable plug in the electrical equipment compartment
(example)
The PSM presents a clearly defined, EMC-tested interface between the vehicle and the body, and is capable of
diagnosis. It is no longer permissible to modify the vehicle wiring as this can lead to fault messages from other
control modules in the CAN bus.
Customer-specific requirements may be special inputs,
e.g. external engine start and stop, or special outputs,
e.g. pulse pause modulated engine speed and CAN bus
compatible control modules in the body or trailer.
The PSM module is connected to the IES system by the
HS CAN bus and therefore has access to all messages
transferred by the connected control modules (e.g. idle
switch turned on, parking brake applied, service brake
applied, speed C3, engine speed). In contrast to this, individual signals can be monitored or generated at analogue and digital inputs and outputs.
Example:
1
The engine speed is transferred to the vehicle engine

control (FMR) in the form of a message and can be
read by the PSM module. The PSM module converts
the rpm signal into a PPM signal which is then available at an output.
In the opposite direction, the PSM can convert the

position of a hand throttle into an HS CAN message
and use it to request the desired engine speed.
All the integrated control modules understand the messages transmitted on the CAN bus and are adapted to
the CAN language, which is known as the protocol.
The programmable special module (PSM), available under code EM8, was developed to provide body manufacturers with access to the individual CAN bus data. The
CAN interface can also be supplied to comply with
ISO 11898 (5-volt based CAN; code EM9). This replaces
the 24-volt based CAN complying with ISO 11992. This
module can read data from the HS CAN bus messages
and translate this, e.g. into switching signals to the outputs provided ("high" or "low") or to PWM (pulse width
modulation) signals which can be used by the electronic
circuits in the body.
150

The various PSM interfaces can be divided into the following categories:
1 Power supply from vehicle electrical system

2 High-speed CAN interface to vehicle star connection
3 Power take-off switch
4 Low-speed CAN interface to electronic circuitry in
the body
5 Low-speed CAN interface to trailer
6 Digital outputs (relay driver), e.g. D+ switched
7 Pulse pause modulation (PPM) and pulse width modulation (PWM) outputs, e.g. speed signal
8 Digital inputs, e.g. engine start
9 Analogue inputs, e.g. hand throttle
Some of the functions that can be realised:
Engine start/engine stop
Engine speed control (power take-off)
Reverse gear lock and speed limiter
Retarder without CAN interface
Automatic transmission without CAN interface
Certain basic functions are assigned to the inputs. These

can be supplemented with additional functions or
changed to other functions by reprogramming. The PSM
parameters can be reprogrammed with STAR DIAGNOSIS.
The many capabilities of the PSM cannot be completely
described within the scope of these body/equipment
mounting directives. For this reason, a manual has been
completed on programming the parameters, which can
be obtained for a nominal fee by writing to the following
addresses and quoting order number 6517 12 33 00 (for
PSM III):
For vehicles in use in Germany:
DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC (Hauspostcode) R 822,
Abteilung GSP/TI, D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany
For vehicles in use outside Germany:
Order from the corresponding Mercedes-Benz sales
company or general distributor.
151

6.17 Wiring diagrams
6.17
Wiring diagrams
Actros (BM 93X)

Use of voltage pins, terminal 30 maximum 10 A
1 Base module
2 Voltage pin, terminal 30 (X7/9/2) maximum 10 A
3 Supplementary equipment switch
4 Working-area lamp
152

Use of voltage pins, terminal 30 over 10A
1 Base module
2 Power distributor, terminal 31 in the frame
5 Terminal connector, terminal 31 in the base module
6 Additional earth line
7 Terminal connector for cab chassis interface
9 Fuse for additional electrical equipment compartment
a Auxiliary pump
153

1 Base module
5 Auxiliary pump
154

Use of general function pin, maximum 10 A
1 Switching signal
2 Base module
4 Switching signal
5 CAN
6 Vehicle CAN output (programmable)
7 Yes/No
8 and
9 Function pin 1 (X12/21/15)
Function pin 2 (X12/21/18)
a Further function signals
b Vehicle CAN output (programmable)
c Vehicle CAN
d Auxiliary headlamp
155

Use of general function pin, above 10
1 Switching signal
2 Base module
5 Additional earth line
6 Vehicle CAN output (programmable)
7 Yes/No
8 Terminal connector, terminal 31 in the base module
9 Terminal connector for cab chassis interface
a Vehicle CAN
b and
c Function pin 1 (X12/21/15)
d Fuse for additional electrical equipment compartment

e Further function signals
f Vehicle CAN output (programmable)
g Vehicle CAN
h Auxiliary pump
156

Use of function pin for auxiliary headlamp (roof)
maximum 10 A
1 Supplementary equipment switch in the auxiliary

headlamp switch panel
2 Base module
3 Supplementary equipment switching signal (Vehicle
CAN)
4 Yes/No
6 Main-beam headlamps switching signal
7 CAN
8 and
a Main-beam headlamps switching signal (Vehicle
CAN)
b Vehicle CAN
c Auxiliary headlamp (roof)
157

Use of the function pin to activate body electronics
at v<6 km/h maximum 10 A
1 Base module
3 Speed signal
4 CAN
5 Speed v<6 km /h (Vehicle CAN)
6 Yes/No
7 and
9 Body
a Vehicle CAN
b Body electronics
158

6.18 Power take-offs
6.18
Power take-offs
Power take-off models supplied from the factory:

Transmission-driven power take-off
Engine-driven power take-off
Engine power take-off at the front
Engine power take-off at the rear
Consider the following when retrofitting power take-offs:
After installation, fill the transmission with oil up to
the lower edge of the filler opening.
Refer to the "Operation" section of the Operating Instructions.
Allow the engine to run for approximately 2 minutes
and engage the power take-off.
Check the oil level again and correct if necessary.
Installation of a non-MB power take-off must be approved by the department responsible ( page 33).
Directives concerning the design and installation of nonMB power take-offs are available on request. The operational reliability of the transmission cannot be guaranteed if unsuitable power take-offs are used.
The power take-off version and choice of ratio both
depend on the power output and speed of the equipment to be driven.
Transmission-driven power take-offs can only be engaged and disengaged with the vehicle stationary.
They are designed for continuous operation.
Data on the maximum transferable torque (Nm) for

the individual power take-offs are guide values for
operation without shock and vibration.
The data was based on a highly durable gearing design and a calculated service life of at least 800
hours at maximum output, in accordance with
DIN 622. Additional inertia forces caused by the
equipment to be driven have not been taken into
consideration.
Select the power take-off ratio such that a minimum
engine speed of 650 800 rpm is maintained with
the power take-off under load.
The power output should be within the maximum engine torque range.
Exposed propeller shafts or pulleys must be covered.
Belts or chain drives must not be fitted to the drive
shaft or flange of a power take-off. In special cases
where absolutely necessary, submit drawings and
required data for approval ( page 33).
!
Failure to observe these instructions could result in
damage to the transmission.
i
Refer to the notes in the Operating Instructions, section "Controls in detail".
159

6.19 Transmission-driven power take-off (NA)
6.19
Transmission-driven power takeoff (NA)
Refer to the Operating Instructions for notes on engaging and disengaging the power take-off.
The power take-off is driven from the transmission idler

shaft.
The power take-off is connected to the manual transmission oil circuit.
Versions:
The maximum permissible weight moment must not

be exceeded if a hydraulic pump is directly connected.
One or two drives

Different directions of rotation
Drive with flange for propeller shaft
Power take-offs without an oil cooler are only approved

for brief operation at full power.
Direct attachment of hydraulic pump
Brief operation:
Shift lock for transmission
Maximum running time: approximately 30 minutes
With or without coupling flange
Subsequent cooling off period: at least 30 minutes

Double drive
Continuous operation:
Full power output with oil cooling, code N55
!
i
All important technical information is contained in the
tables ( pages 257 355).
160

6.20 Engine-driven power take-off (NMV)
6.20
Engine-driven power take-off (NMV)
Engine-driven power take-offs are designed for high

power output. They are driven directly by the engine. The
direction of rotation is the same as the engine.
Engine-driven power take-offs can be operated either when the vehicle is stationary or in motion.
The installed hydraulic multi-plate clutch allows the
power take-off to be engaged or disengaged under
load, regardless of vehicle clutch operation.
Refer to the Operating Instructions for notes on engaging and disengaging the power take-off.
Ensure the power take-off is sufficiently cooled.
The temperature should not exceed 110 C when in
operation. Temperatures up to a maximum of
125 C are permissible for short periods only.
As standard, engine-driven power take-offs are connected to the manual transmission oil circuit and therefore to
an oil cooler.
!
i
All important technical information is contained in the
table ( page 351).
161

6.21 Tipper pump
6.21
Tipper pump
Qp
Torque [Nm]
Engine speed
Output [kW]
Version "c" with splined shaft for direct connection.
Pressure [bar]
Pump volume [litres/ min]
Tipper pump
Efficiency
The Meiller axial tipper pump, which is installed as standard on tipper vehicles, is also available for all other chassis as optional equipment.
Two versions of power take-offs are available for tipper
pumps:
Version "b" with flange for drive via propeller shaft.
600
i
When installing other hydraulic pumps, consider the
following:
Safety clearance to the equipment and chassis
parts (propeller shafts, cross members).
Static and dynamic load on pump.
Weight moment of hydraulic pump (maximum
40 Nm).
Vibration characteristics of engine mountings,
provide for separate mountings on chassis frame
if required.
The drive output (required torque at the power take-off)

can be calculated according to the following formula.
M
9,550 P
n
If pump volume is known

M
15.9 Q P
n
The pump output can be calculated according to the following formula:
162

6.22 Engine power take-off at the front
6.22
Engine power take-off at the front
Additional equipment (e.g. compressors, hydraulic

pumps, fire engine pumps, etc.) can be driven by a drive
at the front of the crankshaft. Propeller shaft drives or
belt drives may be used, depending on the type of vehicle and output. If the engine has noise encapsulation,
provide an opening for the drive.
6.22.2 Propeller shaft

The crankshaft end play must not be affected by the
attachment of a propeller shaft.
A certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible ( page 33).
!
damage to the assemblies.
6.22.1 Belt drive

The transferable power output is limited (approximately 25 kW).
If a higher power output is required, confer with the
department responsible ( page 33).
The following information is required: transmission
ratio, engine speed, number of belts, length of belts,
operating time and assembly to be driven.
A hydraulic pump is available from the factory.
Performance
data:
Hydraulic pump
Pump volume:
16 cm/revolution
Operating
pressure:
170 bar
Maximum engine
speed:
2,600 rpm
Drive:
Poly-V-belt
Performance
data:
Tandem hydraulic
pump
1st circuit
2nd circuit
Pump volume:
14 cm/revolution 5.5 cm/

revolution
Operating
pressure:
250 bar
250 bar
Maximum engine
speed:
3,000 rpm
3,000 rpm
163

6.23 Engine power take-off at the rear
6.23
An engine power take-off at the rear is available for vehicles with series 900 and 500 engines. The engine power
take-off cannot be engaged or disengaged.
The direction of rotation is the same as that of the engine.
Transmission ratio: 1.071 x engine speed (BR 900 in-line
engines)
Transmission ratio: 1.15 x engine speed (BR 500 V-engines)
A certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible when retrofitting assemblies
( page 33).
Do not exceed the maximum permissible torque.
Provide overload protection (e.g. pressure relief control for hydraulic pumps, and overload clutch, antilock protection or breakage protection for other assemblies).
!
Engine
Maximum
transferable torque,
Nm
Briefly permissible
excess torque (e.g.
when pulling away
and changing gear)
Maximum moment of
inertia (resilient
coupling) in kgm
Spare part number of

resilient coupling
BR 500
600
20 %
0.02
444 250 00 01 (code N54)
BR 900
600
20 %
0.02
906 250 00 01 (code N54)
164

Always fit the resilient coupling on the assembly to
be driven.
6.23.1 Rigid drive

The moment of inertia of the driven rotary masses
(including propeller shaft) must not exceed
0.01 kgm.
Take the length of the resilient coupling into consideration when determining the length of the propeller
shaft.
The engine speed must not fall below 1,200 rpm
when the power take-off is operating at full load. If
operation at lower speeds is necessary, e.g. because
of noise, a lower engine speed may be acceptable if
the department responsible performs the necessary
tests and is satisfied with the results ( page 33).
6.23.2 Resilient drive

The original resilient coupling (code N54) must be fitted if the moment of inertia is greater than
0.01 kgm.
Dimensions of resilient coupling

Coupling
Number
of holes
External
diameter
Width
Reich
102
840,1
57h8
M8
212
83
165

Dimensions coupling flange engine power take-off at the rear
a
Number of
holes
100
84*0.1
57h8
8.1*0.15
Flange
166

6.23.3 Engine power take-off at the rear
Engine power take-off with flange
167

Engine
Engine position
A (mm)
B (mm)
OM 501 LA
High
177
213
Low
173
128
High
349
204
Low
345
119
OM 502 LA
V-engine
7
1 Centre of front axle

A Centre of front axle to centre of coupling flange
B Upper edge of frame to centre of coupling flange
The centre of the engine power take-off is 182 mm from
the centre of the crankshaft.
168

6.24 Installation of propeller shaft
6.24
Installation of propeller shaft
Observe the following when installing propeller shafts:
Angle offset in two planes (three-dimensional angular offset)
Installation guidelines from the propeller shaft manufacturer.

If necessary, use several propeller shafts with intermediate bearings.
The flanging surfaces must be completely flat.
The angle offsets must be the same at both universal
joints (1 = 2). The angles must be between 6 and
1.
Balancing plates must not be removed.
Make sure that markings on the propeller shafts
match up when installing.
Eliminate any vibrations, e.g. by optimising the propeller shaft angles.
6.24.1 Types of angle offset

Angle offset in one plane (two-dimensional angle
offset)
1 = 2
In the case of a three-dimensional angle offset, the input
and output shafts intersect in different planes (combined W-type and Z-type offset).
The inner joint forks must be offset to compensate for irregularities.
!
N41.00-2014-00
1 = 2
Upper = Z-type offset
Lower = W-type offset
169

6.25 Trailer coupling
6.25
Trailer coupling
6.25.2 Open-jaw coupling

In Germany, the open-jaw coupling must comply with
DIN 74050/EC Directive 94/20/EC.
6.25.1 General
Risk of accident
Danger of trailer breaking away from tow vehicle.

The trailer coupling must not be modified (e.g. bending, welding work or cutting).
Fitting the trailer coupling must comply with national
regulations.
When retrofitting trailer couplings, we recommend that
you only use makes, models and end cross members
that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Observe the hole pattern in the end cross member to determine the coupling size.
Observe the following points during installation:

Maximum distance of 420 mm from the centre of the
coupling pin on the trailer coupling to the end of the
body.
In exceptional cases, the clearance of 420 mm may
be exceeded:
Maximum distance of 650 mm on vehicles with tilting bodies or rear mounted equipment.
Maximum distance of 1,320 mm, when the height
from the road surface to the lower edge of the body
is at least 1,150 mm.
Clearance dimensions
The size of the trailer coupling is determined from the

drawbar ratio ( page 238).
170

i
Operating instructions must be included with the vehicle indicating the special features and operation of
the coupling.
In exceptional cases, e.g. on tipper vehicle bodies,

use a trailer coupling with a universal joint to allow
vertical movement of the coupling jaw.
Safe and easy operation of the coupling must not be
impaired.
If one or more regulations regarding safe and easy operation cannot be maintained, use a coupling with remote
control. The remote control must satisfy the following
conditions:
Faultless operation.
The control unit must be permanently mounted on
the vehicle and must not be detachable.
The control unit must be easily accessible, simple to
use, must not pose a risk and must be impossible to
mistake for some other device.
The coupling must allow safe detachment even under an axial twisting of at least +10.
When the trailer is coupled, it must be easily possible
to determine by means of visual inspection or an indicator whether the coupling pin is engaged and secured.
171

6.25.3 Ball hitch coupling
In Germany, the ball hitch coupling must comply with
DIN 74058/EC Directive 94/20/EC.
In Germany, in case of deviations from the accident prevention regulations (UVV), a certificate must be requested from:
Observe the following clearance dimensions for the installation:
Telephone:
+49 (0) 40 39 80 0
Fax:
+49 (0) 40 39 80-19 99
E-mail:
info@bgf.de
Postal address:
Berufsgenossenschaft fr
Fahrzeughaltungen (German
Trade Association of Vehicle
Owners)
Ottenser Hauptstrae 54
D-22765 Hamburg, Germany
A certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible for the installation of short couplings
( page 33).
172

6.26 Use of vehicle with centre-axle trailer
6.26
Use of vehicle with centre-axle trailer
Risk of accident
road.
!
The trailer drawbar load must also be considered in
the design.
The minimum front axle loads must be maintained
( page 70).
A centre-axle trailer is a trailer with one axle or a group
of axles, which
is connected to the towing vehicle by a drawbar connected rigidly to the trailer chassis
is designed in such a way that no substantial part of
its gross weight is supported by the tow vehicle.
Corresponding to the draft standards for automatic pin
couplings 40 and 50 in DIN 74051 and 74052, only the
towing weights listed in the following table are permissible for the respective DIN coupling sizes with centre-axle
trailers:
Coupling sizes
Permissible towing weight

with centre-axle trailer in kg
G 135
6,500
G 145
9,000
G 150
9,500
G5
12,000
G6
18,000
173

6.27 Lowered trailer coupling
6.27
Lowered trailer coupling
Fit in accordance with the drawings.
In these versions, the permissible towing weight specified in the vehicle documents remains unchanged.
Move standard trailer connections if required.

Examples of design
174

Examples of design
175

6.27.1 Lowered trailer coupling for centre-axle
trailer
Vehicles without mounting frame
Equip vehicles with a 120 x 60 x 6 mm mounting frame.

This does not apply to demountable bodies without an
auxiliary subframe.
Secure the longitudinal body member and coupling
bracket with a minimum of ten M 14 x 1.5 flange head
bolts.
Vehicles without mounting frame
1 Chassis frame
2 Cross member
4 Gusset
5 Section
1 Chassis frame
2 Cross member
4 Gusset
5 Section
176

Vehicles with mounting frame
Vehicles with mounting frame
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
3 Bracket
4 Cross member
177

6.28 Semitrailer tractor vehicles
6.28
Semitrailer tractor vehicles
6.28.1 Semitrailer tractor chassis

Only use an approved semitrailer tractor chassis.
The frame, suspension and brake system are to be designed accordingly.
i
Refer to the notes on selecting the chassis, Section 3
"Planning of bodies" ( page 44) and semitrailer,
Section 4 "Technical limit values for planning"
( page 75).
6.28.2 Standard chassis for semitrailer tractor

vehicles
Standard chassis should be converted to semitrailer
tractors only in exceptional cases.
i
Refer to the notes on selecting the chassis, Section 3
"Planning of bodies" ( page 44) and semitrailer,
Section 4 "Technical limit values for planning"
( page 75).
Refer to the notes on semitrailer coupling in Section
7 "Types of bodies" ( page 220).
Refer to the notes on semitrailer coupling in Section

7 "Types of bodies" ( page 220).
Exceptions must be approved by the department responsible ( page 33).
Only a semitrailer coupling may be mounted on a

semitrailer tractor chassis. Exceptions must be approved by the department responsible ( page 33).
Necessary modification work on the chassis frame

Shorten the rear chassis overhang to the minimum
and replace the rear spring bracket cross member
with the end cross member.
Replace the standard rear springs with springs for
semitrailer tractor vehicles.
Fit an anti-roll bar on the rear axle.
Route the coupling heads of the brake lines and the
trailer power socket behind the cab.
178

6.29 Connections for brake system and electrical system
6.29
Connections for brake system and

electrical system
!
Make sure that the cables and compressed-air lines
give slightly when cornering, and do not pull tight,
kink or rub. After making the connections, check the
function of the consumers on the trailer/semitrailer.
Refer to the "Operation" Section of the Operating Instructions for notes on connecting the cables and
compressed-air lines.
Use only automatic coupling heads on the reservoir
pressure lines and brake lines.
The bracket for the trailer power socket must be designed in such a way that it will not be bent out of
shape if the plug cannot be easily connected.
If the brake system lines and electrical system cables cannot be easily reached from the road surface
to connect /disconnect them, a suitable working
surface of at least 400 mm x 500 mm and safe access up to the working surface must be provided.
The connecting lines must not chafe on body components. If there is insufficient space/clearance to the
cab rear panel (e.g. for EURO semitrailers), position
the coupling heads higher in accordance with ISO
1728 or fit a swivelling arm.
Position the shield such that the universal joint of the
propeller shaft is covered from above. This prevents
the cab and semitrailer being soiled by grease.
179
7 Types of bodies
7.1 General
7.1
General
Risk of fire

altered.
completion of work.

The assemblies fitted during installation, mounting or

conversion must comply with all applicable laws and
directives, with the rules for accident prevention and
occupational health and safety as well as the safety
rules and bulletins issued by accident insurers.
Bodies which entail increased water impact on the

transmission, e.g. from cleaning water (wash mode,
overflow, etc.), require an effective cover over the
gears (transmission protection), which precludes any
abrupt cooling or water intake via the transmission
ventilation.
i
You can obtain further information about bolted and
welded connections in Section 3 "Planning of bodies"
( page 48) and Section 5 "Damage prevention"
( page 85) as well as the Mercedes-Benz workshop
information system (WIS) ( page 40).
180
7 Types of bodies
7.2 Mounting frame
7.2
Mounting frame
In order to ensure a firm and correct connection between the chassis and the body, all bodies require a
mounting frame or substructure with the function of a
mounting frame (except for self-supporting bodies and
mounting frames as floor assembly).
The mounting frame longitudinal member should lie
level on the upper chord of the chassis frame and follow the course of the chassis frame.
Position mounting frame cross members above the
chassis frame cross members.
Use flanged U-sections for the longitudinal members
or commercially available U-sections for vehicle construction (do not use rolled steel sections).
The longitudinal member dimensions can be calculated from the required moment of resistance (Wx)
for the body and chassis. See diagram ( page 187).
The specified moments of resistance and section dimensions assume that the longitudinal frame members are loaded uniformly on each side.
!
If a number of bodies are mounted on one chassis
(e.g. platform and loading tailgate), the higher of the
specified moments of resistance must be used for
calculating the dimensions of the mounting frame.
181
7 Types of bodies
7.2 Mounting frame
7.2.1
Mounting frame material
High-strength steel mounting frames

(e.g. N-A-XTRA) must have at least the rigidity of
steel mounting frames.
The mounts must be friction-locking.
Aluminium platform bodies:
Observe the instructions given by the aluminium
manufacturer.
The longitudinal members, plank floor, floor panels
and cross members must form one self-supporting
unit.
The suitability and therefore use of materials with low
strength properties for the mounting frame can only be
determined by means of an endorsement check by the
department responsible ( page 33). Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use the materials described or superior ones.
1 Mounting frame
Material qualities for specified steel mounting frames:
Mounting frame mounted with U-bolt or bracket
(friction-locking) = St 52 or E 380 TM.
You can obtain further information about welded and

bolted connections in Section 3 "Planning of bodies"
( page 48) and Section 5 "Damage prevention"
( page 85) as well as the Mercedes-Benz workshop
information system (WIS) ( page 40).
Mounting frame with rigid mounting (form-locking)

using tabs = E 500 TM.
Material
Tensile strength
Yield point
N /mm
N/ mm
E 380 TM
(St 52)
>450
380
E 500 TM
>560
500
182
7 Types of bodies
7.2 Mounting frame
7.2.2
Mounting frame design
All model series

The sections should taper gently at the front end of the
longitudinal body members. The edges should be deburred.
Continuous mounting frames are required for:
Bodies with a high centre of gravity
High point loading
One-sided loading
Superstructures extending over the cab
For example, for: tipper bodies, glass transport frame
bodies, towing bodies, loading cranes, hinged booms,
loading tailgates, etc.
The longitudinal body members must extend as far forward as possible, but at the very least beyond the rear
front spring brackets.
1 Mounting frame
2 Chassis frame
Actros design examples (BM 93X), Axor

(BM 94X, 95X), Econic
1 Mounting frame
2 Chassis frame
1 Mounting frame
2 Chassis frame
183
7 Types of bodies
7.2 Mounting frame
Atego (BM 97X)
Design examples for all model series
Only connect the mounting frame to the longitudinal

frame members (U-section). Do not connect them to the
flange on the front end of the frame (Z-section).
Transition from closed to open U-section
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fastenings

that are available from the factory under code CR4. On
short cab bodies, let them project beyond the longitudinal frame member when viewed in the direction of travel.
If, for stability reasons, it appears necessary to connect
the body and chassis, proceed as with a crane structure
and use an internal retaining plate behind the cab to connect them (connection to the front end of the frame).
All model series
If extremely high longitudinal body members are required or an extremely low frame height needs to be
achieved, the U-section on friction-locking connections
may be:
as a closed box
inside overlapping or
overlapping
This increases the moment of resistance, and also the
torsional stability. Ensure a good transition from a closed
longitudinal body member to an open U-section.
184
7 Types of bodies
7.2 Mounting frame
Design examples for all model series
A Open U-section (Wx, see section dimensions

diagram)
B Closed U-section (Wx, see section dimensions
diagram x 1.25)
C Inside overlapping section (Wx, see section
dimensions diagram x 1.75)
D Overlapping U-section (Wx, see section dimensions
diagram x 1.9)
185
7 Types of bodies
7.2 Mounting frame
Mounting frame as floor assembly
A mounting frame with continuous longitudinal body

members is not required when the floor assembly of the
body can assume the function of the mounting frame.
186
7 Types of bodies
7.2 Mounting frame
7.2.3
Section dimensions
All model series
The mounting frame and chassis frame should have the

same material thickness and flange width.
Section height in mm
Section dimensions for mounting frame longitudinal

member (open section).
187
7 Types of bodies
7.3 Securing the mounting frame
7.3
Securing the mounting frame
All model series

Lateral fastening:
All model series

Determine how the mounting frame is to be secured according to chassis type and the intended body and the
intended purpose of the vehicle.
Determine the number of mountings to absorb braking
and lateral forces.
Correct mounting is important for:
Use guide plates of sufficient size.

There must be no gap between the guide plates and
mounting frame.
Take production tolerances for the chassis frame
width into consideration (+6/3 mm maximum) for
prefabricated mounting frames.
handling characteristics and vehicle operating safety
service life of the chassis frame and body
Offset systems:
If the mounting frame is wider than the chassis

frame, fit bracket mountings.
Mounting elements (brackets) are available as optional

equipment from the factory under code CR4. The arrangement of the brackets is shown on the relevant tender drawing.
For a friction-locking connection, the longitudinal body
members must be fixed in both longitudinal and lateral
directions.
The upper side of the bracket and the chassis frame

must be level with one another.
Weld the mounting frame and brackets together.
Securing the mounting frame
Longitudinal fastening:
Remove securing rivets for the end cross member.
Bolt the mounting frame, chassis frame and end
cross member together using flange head nuts and
bolts in accordance with Mercedes-Benz standards
(MBN) 10105, 10112 and 13023.
Atego (BM 97X)
Make the longitudinal fastening by means of a tab
mounting in the rear axle area ( page 189).
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
3 Cross member
4 Bolts for longitudinal fastening
5 Guide plate for lateral fastening
188
7 Types of bodies
7.3.1
Friction-locking connection bracket

mounting
Attaching plates
Actros (BM 93X), Axor (BM 94X, BM 95X), Econic

It may be possible to move the mounting frame longitudinal member in relation to the chassis longitudinal member.
Carry out strength calculations for each longitudinal
body member separately.
Divide bending moment in accordance with moments of inertia.
The front fastening points should be elastic (cup
springs, rubber mountings).
Only use guide plates on the chassis frame in the
area of the rear axles and rear springs (except for vehicles with two driven rear axles).
On vehicles which are equipped with bracket fixtures fitted as standard, the body should be secured to these
brackets.
Use a rectangular washer between the chassis
bracket and cup spring to cover the slotted hole.
The same applies when T-bolts are used instead of
brackets.
Provide elastic mounting in the area behind the cab
(e.g. by underlaying cup springs or rubber mountings).
After the bolts have been tightened, the spacing (A)
between the link bracket on the longitudinal frame
member and the body and chassis brackets behind
the cab must be at least 5 mm ( page 190). Compensate for differences in spacing on the other
brackets using shims.
Do not twist the mounting frame when tightening the
bolts.
189
7 Types of bodies
Spacing A = 5 mm minimum
190
7 Types of bodies
Atego (BM 97X)
It may be possible to move the mounting frame longitudinal member in relation to the chassis longitudinal member.
Carry out strength calculations for each longitudinal
body member separately.
Divide bending moment in accordance with moments of inertia.
The front fastening points should be elastic (cup
springs, rubber mountings).
In the area of the rear axles and rear springs on the
chassis frame, only use guide plates for longitudinal
fastening.
Use a rectangular washer between the chassis
bracket and cup spring to cover the slotted hole.
The same applies when T-bolts are used instead of
brackets.
max. 1000
Provide elastic mounting in the area behind the cab

(e.g. by underlaying cup springs or rubber mountings).
After the bolts have been tightened, the spacing (A)
between the link bracket on the longitudinal frame
member and the body and chassis brackets behind
the cab must be at least 5 mm ( page 190).
Compensate for differences in spacing on the other
brackets using shims. If this is not possible, ensure
that the lateral structure of the mounting frame is
adequate, using appropriate guide plates.
Do not twist the mounting frame when tightening the
bolts.
Brackets for securing the body are available as optional
equipment under part number 976 310 00 58.
!
Observe the maximum tightening torque of 30 Nm.
min. 1100
ca. 1150
2
415
410
O 19,0
4
1 End of Z-section
2 260 mm frame height
3 220 mm frame height
4 Centre of rear axle
191
7 Types of bodies
7.3.2
Form-locking rigid connection tab

fixing
Tab fixing
It is not possible to move the mounting frame longitudinal member opposite the chassis longitudinal
member.
The mounting frame longitudinal member moves
with the chassis longitudinal member (bending,
twisting).
For the purposes of strength calculations, both longitudinal body members are regarded as one component.
When assembling cement mixer trucks, rear loading
cranes, rear-end tipper bodies and similar bodies,
the mounting frame must be fixed rigidly to the chassis frame.
The mounting frame must be closed to form a box at
the rear and reinforced with a diagonal cross.
Mount torsionally rigid bodies (e.g. box-type bodies,
tanks) on the mounting frame behind the cab by
means of elastic connections. Continuous elastic
mounting is not permitted.
Fasten the tabs on the chassis frame with at least 3
flange head bolts next to one another, in accordance
with MBN 10105, 10112 and 13023.
Maximum distance between tabs 700 mm.
Match the material thickness of the tabs to the
strengths and weights of the body. The tabs should
be at least as thick as the chassis frame.
Use bracket mountings at the front.
If continuous tab mounting is to be used up to the
cab (e.g. when assembling heavy loading cranes), a
certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible ( page 33).
192
7 Types of bodies
7.3.3
Quick-release lock for demountable

bodies
The number of quick-release locks must be sufficient

to ensure that both braking and lateral forces can be
fully absorbed.
Ensure that the design and mounting are reliable.
There must be no play when the body is locked on
the mounting frame.
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
3 Retaining plate
4 Quick-release lock
5 Mounting device
193
7 Types of bodies
7.4 Self-supporting bodies
7.4
Self-supporting bodies
7.4.1
General
7.4.2

altered.
Van and box-type bodies
A mounting frame with continuous longitudinal body

members is not necessary for self-supporting van or boxtype bodies if cross members are mounted at maximum
intervals of 600 mm.
The maximum distance of 600 mm may be exceeded in
the area of the rear axle attachment if required for tyre
clearance (suspension).

completion of work.
The assemblies fitted during installation, mounting or
conversion must comply with all applicable laws and
directives, with the rules for accident prevention and
occupational health and safety as well as the safety
rules and bulletins issued by accident insurers.
194
7 Types of bodies
7.5 Platform and demountable bodies
7.5
Platform and demountable bodies
The body must be secured with a mounting frame

(U-section longitudinal members) to ensure that the
load on the chassis frame is evenly distributed.
The body must be in contact with the longitudinal
chassis frame members without distortion.
Position the vehicle on a level surface to mount the
body.
If loads are concentrated at points or small areas on
the standard platform (e.g. when transporting cable
drums, coils, etc.), reinforce the substructure and
platform floor as required to adequately support the
load.
Before mounting the body: weigh the chassis and determine body length.
7.5.1
Platform body
Moment of resistance of mounting frame longitudinal member:

Vehicle
Moment of resistance
per longitudinal member in cm3
Actros
(BM 93X),
Axor
(BM 95X),
Econic
45
For section dimensions of longitudinal members, see

diagram ( page 187).
The mounting frames for platforms available from
the factory are designed as follows:
Chassis with long cab:

If necessary, shorten the frame overhang at the rear
so that the permissible rear axle load is not exceeded and the minimum front axle load is achieved.
Atego
(BM 97X)
Dimension
Attach reflectors to the body in accordance with legal regulations (in Germany, Section 51a StVZO
(German road traffic licensing regulations)).
7.. 10.. L
70 x 50 x 3 mm
12.. 15.. L
100 x 50 x 5 mm
Attach an air deflector behind the cab to prevent hot

engine air being directed against the body.
Retrofit platform bodies accordingly. The dimensions

should only fall below these figures if there is no punctiform application of forces and cross members are
mounted at maximum intervals of 600 mm. The maximum distance of 600 mm may be exceeded in the area
of the rear axle attachment if required for clearance (e.g.
suspension).
195
7 Types of bodies
7.5 Platform and demountable bodies
7.5.2
Demountable bodies
Twist locks:
Secure the extension to the chassis frame with at least
6 M 14 flange head bolts. Use pressure distribution
plates to ensure that forces exerted are widely spread. If
possible, use the existing holes on the chassis frame.
i
Demountable bodies without auxiliary subframes require a certificate of endorsement from the department responsible ( page 33).
196
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
7.6
Loading crane
Risk of accident
7.6.1
The following text concerning the vehicle's stability

when a loading crane is to be mounted on it is to be
taken into consideration for design purposes.
Limit the crane's slewing range. There is otherwise a
risk of the vehicle tipping over.
Observe the safety and operating instructions provided by the loading crane manufacturer.
Loading cranes mounted on vehicles in Germany
must comply with accident prevention regulations
(UVV).
Specific national guidelines and regulations must be
observed.

on Actros (BM 93X), Axor (BM 95X),
Econic
!
The loading crane and supporting devices must
not impair the operation of other assemblies.
Mount the loading crane on a steel mounting
frame.
The mounting frame material must be appropriate
for the chassis frame.
Do not raise the vehicle using the outrigger
(damage to the frame).
Outriggers which protrude beyond the vehicle
during operation when stationary should be identified with conspicuous colours, reflectors and
warning lights.
Mounting frame
Observe information on determining the chassis size

( page 44).
The mounting frame longitudinal member must extend to beneath the cab. On vehicles with a long cab,
extend the mounting frame up to the rear of the front
spring bracket or limit the slewing range of the loading crane.
In the loading crane area, the mounting frame longitudinal members must be of box section.
The transition from a box section to a U-section must
be gradual and suitable for the load.
If a crane with four support points is fitted, a certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible ( page 33).
Maximum crane load moment (kN x l) ( page 200).
Moments of resistance (Wx) for mounting frame longitudinal members ( page 200).
These values apply to longitudinal chassis frame and
mounting frame members with equal loads on each
side. Approval from the department responsible is
required for crane pillars mounted off centre
( page 33).
197
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
For section dimensions of mounting frame longitudinal members ( page 187).
The dimensions for the mounting frame longitudinal
members in the area of the platform or the tipper
body are given in the table for platform bodies or tipper bodies.
Outriggers which protrude beyond the vehicle when

stationary should be identified with conspicuous colours, reflectors and warning lights.
The mounting frame can be attached according to

the section on securing ( page 188). If this is not
possible, connect the mounting frame rigidly with
the chassis frame and mount the loading crane in
elastic mounts.
If the maximum crane load moments are exceeded,

approval is required from the department responsible ( page 33). The crane mounting must be reinforced.
Only use the vehicle on level roads with a firm road
surface.
If the crane support is to be fastened at three points,

a certificate of endorsement from the department
responsible is required ( page 33).
Calculate the platform length according to the position and weight of the loading crane in accordance
with permissible axle loads.
The resulting distribution of the load within the vehicle may make a frame extension necessary.
Provide outriggers for every crane. Mercedes-Benz

recommends hydraulic outriggers.
198
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
3 Crane base
4 U-bolt
5 Bracket
6 Retaining plate
199
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
Moments of resistance for a loading crane loading
crane behind the cab
Actros (BM 93X)
1,832 2,558
Axor (BM 95X)
1,823 1,828
Econic
1,823 1,828
Actros (BM 93X)
2,631 4,158
Axor (BM 95X)
2,628
Econic
2,628
200
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
7.6.2

on Atego (BM 97X)
!
The loading crane and supporting devices must
not impair the operation of other assemblies.
The mounting frame can be attached according to

the section on securing ( page 188). If this is not
possible, connect the mounting frame rigidly with
the chassis frame and mount the loading crane in
elastic mounts.

frame.
If the crane support is to be fastened at three points,

a certificate of endorsement from the department
responsible is required ( page 33).

Provide outriggers for every crane. Mercedes-Benz

recommends hydraulic outriggers.
Do not raise the vehicle using the outrigger (damage to the frame).
Outriggers which protrude beyond the vehicle when

stationary should be identified with conspicuous colours, reflectors and warning lights.

warning lights.
Mounting frame
In the loading crane area, the mounting frame longitudinal members must be of box section.
be gradual and suitable for the load.
If a crane with four support points is fitted, a certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible ( page 33).
For maximum crane load moment (kN x l) see table
( page 202).
( page 33).
For section dimensions of mounting frame longitudinal members ( page 187).
The dimensions for the mounting frame longitudinal
members in the area of the platform or the tipper
body are given in the table for platform bodies or tipper bodies.
Calculate the platform length according to the position and weight of the loading crane in accordance
with permissible axle loads.
If the maximum crane load moments are exceeded,
approval is required from the department responsible ( page 33).
The crane mounting must be reinforced.
Only use the vehicle on level roads with a firm road
surface.
The resulting distribution of the load within the vehicle may make a frame extension necessary.
Equipment for preparing the loading crane is available (code PV4). This includes a 105 x 65 x 6 mm reinforcing bracket which can be fitted on vehicles
with a permissible gross vehicle weight of up to
9,500 kg. It also contains panels for attaching the
mounting frame. These panels must be plug welded
to the mounting frame.
For illustrations on positioning the plates, see the
body manufacturer information portal/MBAS Web/
information types/additional information
( page 38).
201
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
Maximum crane moment loading crane behind the
cab
Permissible gross
vehicle weight in
kg
7,500 8,600
9,500
10,500
12,000
13,500
15,000
Longitudinal frame
member
of vehicle
dimensions in mm/
Material
3-point fastening
Auxiliary subframe 140 x 65 x 6 mm
Permissible crane moment in kNm
without reinforcing
bracket
with reinforcing
bracket
4-point fastening
Auxiliary subframe
100 x 65 x 6 mm
Permissible crane
moment in kNm
220 x 65 x 5 /E 380 TM
55
65
70
220 x 65 x 6 /E 380 TM
70
80
80
220 x 65 x 5 /E 500 TM
75
80
90
220 x 65 x 5.5/
E 500 TM
80
85
100
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
85
85
105
220 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
80
85
90
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
105
220 x 65 x 7 /E 500 TM
120
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
105
220 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
120
260 x 65 x 5,5/
E 500 TM
120
260 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
130
260 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
115
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
105
220 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
120
260 x 65 x 5,5/
E 500 TM
120
260 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
130
260 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
115
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
105
220 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
120
260 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
130
260 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
115
202
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
7.6.3
Rear-mounted loading crane on Actros

(BM 93X), Axor (BM 95X), Econic
The vehicle's stability must be guaranteed by adequate supports.

Do not exceed the permissible rear axle load.
Provide diagonal bracing in the rear area of the

mounting frame.
The diagonal bracing length should be at least
1.5 times the frame width. This increases the torsion
rigidity of the chassis frame.
Where diagonal bracing is not possible, e.g. in the

area of the shock absorbers or spring-loaded brake
cylinders, inclined braces or tubular cross members
can be fitted ( page 205).

frame.
Equip the chassis with reinforced rear springs and an

anti-roll bar on the rear axle if necessary.


( page 70).
Operation with a centre-axle trailer is not permissible.
warning lights.
Mounting frame
For the crane load moment (kNm) and mounting
frame moments of resistance (Wx), see diagram
( page 206).
For section dimensions of longitudinal frame members, see diagram ( page 187).
( page 33).
If possible, extend the mounting frame to beneath
the cab and use a box section from the end of the
frame to the front of the rear spring bracket.
be gradual.
Connect the mounting frame rigidly to the chassis
frame (e.g. by means of tabs).
203
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
3 U-section cross member
4 Diagonal bracing
5 Centre of 1st rear axle
6 Centre of rear axles
7 Centre of 2nd rear axle
204
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
Tubular cross member
1 Tube (minimum 80 x 4 mm)

2 Mounting frame
3 Mounting bracket
4 Chassis frame
205
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
Overall crane moments and mounting frame moments of resistance rear-mounted loading crane
Two-axle vehicles
(4 x 2)
Three and four-axle

vehicles (6 x 4 and
8 x 4)
Axor (BM 95X)
Two-axle vehicles
(4 x 2)
Three-axle vehicles
(6 x 4)
Econic
Three-axle vehicles
(6 x 4)
Two-axle vehicles
(4 x 2)
Axor (BM 95X)

Econic
Actros (BM 93X)
Actros (BM 93X)
Actros (BM 93X)
Three-axle vehicles
(6 x 2)
Axor (BM 95X)
Three-axle vehicles
(6 x 2)
Econic
Three-axle vehicles
(6 x 2)
206
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
7.6.4
Rear-mounted loading crane on Atego

(BM 97X)
The vehicle's stability must be guaranteed by adequate supports.

Do not exceed the permissible rear axle load.
!
frame.
Provide diagonal bracing in the rear area of the

mounting frame.
The diagonal bracing length should be at least
1.5 times the frame width. This increases the torsion
rigidity of the chassis frame.
Where diagonal bracing is not possible, e.g. in the
area of the shock absorbers or spring-loaded brake
cylinders, inclined braces or tubular cross members
can be fitted ( page 205).
Equip the chassis with reinforced rear springs and an
anti-roll bar on the rear axle if necessary. It is essential that an end cross member is fitted.
( page 70).

warning lights.
Mounting frame
For the crane load moment (kNm) and mounting
frame moments of resistance (Wx), see diagram
( page 208).
For section dimensions of longitudinal frame members, see diagram ( page 187).
( page 33).
If possible, extend the mounting frame to beneath
the cab and use a box section from the end of the
frame to the front of the rear spring bracket.
be gradual.
Connect the mounting frame rigidly to the chassis
frame (e.g. by means of tabs).
207
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
Maximum crane moment rear-mounted loading
crane
Permissible gross
vehicle weight in
kg
Wheelbase in mm
Longitudinal frame
member of vehicle
dimensions in mm/
material
Permissible crane
moment in kNm
Recommended
frame profile for
4-point fastening
6,500
3,020 4,220
22 x 65 x 5/E 380 TM
64
80 x 60 x 5
7,500 8,600
3,020 4,220
220 x 65 x 5 /E 380 TM
64
80 x 60 x 5
4,820
220 x 65 x 6 /E 380 TM
64
60 x 60 x 5
3,020
220 x 65 x 5 /E 500 TM
70
60 x 60 x 5
3,020 4,220
220 x 65 x 5.5 /
E 500 TM
70
60 x 60 x 5
4,820
220 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
70
60 x 60 x 5
3,020 4,220
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
4,820
220 x 65 x 7 /E 500 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
3,260
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
3,560
260 x 65 x 5.5 /
E 500 TM
83
4,160
260 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
4,760 5,360
260 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
3,260
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
3,560
260 x 65 x 5.5 /
E 500 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
4,160
260 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
83
4,760 5,360
260 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
83
60 x 60 x 5
3,260
220 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
100
100 x 60 x 5
3,560 4,160
260 x 65 x 6 /E 500 TM
100
60 x 60 x 5
4,760 5,360
260 x 65 x 7 /E 380 TM
100
80 x 60 x 5
9,500
10,500
12,000
13,500
15,000
208
7 Types of bodies
7.6 Loading crane
7.6.5
Removable loading crane
7.6.6
Vehicles with lifting trailing axle
Do not exceed permissible axle loads (even with the

trailing axle raised).
Ensure that lighting equipment meets legal regulations.
Comply with the minimum front axle load in all operating conditions (including when the trailing axle is
raised). You can find information on this in Section 4
"Technical threshold values for planning"
( page 67).
Failure to observe these specifications may have an
adverse effect on handling, steering and braking
characteristics.
The body can be mounted according to the "Rearmounted loading crane" section.
Provide easy access to the trailer, brake and light
connections; if necessary, provide an adapter for a
second coupling.
When the vehicle is handed over, the vehicle owner

must be advised that it may not be permissible to
raise the lifting axle if a loading crane is mounted on
the rear of the vehicle.
Load specifications with regard to the minimum
front axle load and possibilities for using the lifting
axle must be added to the vehicle Operating Instructions.
209
7 Types of bodies
7.7 Tipper bodies
7.7
Tipper bodies
Section dimensions and moments of resistance for

mounting frames:
Risk of accident
Ensure that the vehicle is stable when stationary.

There is otherwise a risk of the vehicle tipping over.
The values given refer to normal operating conditions.

Consult the department responsible in the event of difficult operating conditions ( page 33).
Observe the safety and operating instructions provided by the tipper body manufacturer.
Comply with all national laws, guidelines and regulations.
i
Due to the exceptional loads, three-way and rear-end
tipper bodies may only be fitted on the chassis intended for this purpose ( page 44).
Fit reinforced rear springs and anti-roll bars if required
and available.
7.7.1
Mounting frame
i
Observe notes on mounting frame design
( page 183).
The mounting frame must be manufactured without
joints and with adequately dimensioned steel cross
members.
Close the rear end to form a box and reinforce it with
a diagonal cross.
Connect the mounting frame to the chassis frame in
accordance with the load ( page 189).
Weld the guide plates to the mounting frame in the
area of the cross members to fix the mounting frame
laterally.
For section dimensions of longitudinal members

( page 187).
Vehicle
Atego
(BM 97X)
2-axle
7.. K-9.. K
vehicle
10.. K-15.. K 2-axle
vehicle
Actros
2-axle
(BM 93X),
vehicle
Axor
3-axle
(BM 95X)
vehicle
4-axle
vehicle
Econic
2-axle
vehicle
6x2 /4
3-axle
vehicle
6x4
3-axle
vehicle
1
2
Moment of resistance Wx
per longitudinal
member in cm3
30
45
601) 2)
903)
1303) 4)
701) 2)
903)
1053)
Frame closed to form a box above the rear axles.

Mounting frame rigidly secured to the chassis frame
(in the rear pivot area with 4 M 14 x 1.5 flange head
bolts per side).
Mounting frame closed to form a box from the end of
the frame to approximately 2,000 mm in front of the
centre of the rear axles. Mounting frame rigidly secured to the chassis frame, reaching at least as far
as the front of the tipper lift ram (in the rear pivot
area with 4 M 14x1.5 flange head bolts per side).
Rear-end tipper bodies only.
210
7 Types of bodies
7.7 Tipper bodies
7.7.2
Pivot
7.7.5
On three-way and rear-end tipper bodies, position

the rear pivot as close as possible to the rear axle.
The platform gate must not strike against the end of
the frame, the light fittings or the trailer coupling
when it is folded up.
Provide guide brackets for the front pivots to guide
them when the tipper body is lowered.
7.7.3
Safety fittings
The arrester cables should sag slightly in the end position.
Vehicles with disc brakes on the rear

axle
Protection packages are available for axles with disc

brakes.
Code BD0 (standard on tipper chassis) this code is
required to protect against lateral bulk good movement when disc brakes are used on tipper vehicles.
Code BC8 (option) this protection package is recommended to protect against heavy dirt build-up
(particularly if there are problems of differential wear
of the brake pad/lining within the brake or the axle).
Fit a support (folding support) to prevent the tipper

body from dropping.
Safeguard controls against unintentional operation.
The "tipper body" indicator lamp should be connected to give a visual warning if the tipper body is not
tilted back fully (travel position).
7.7.4
Lifting press
If possible, position the mounting frame cross members directly above the chassis frame cross members.
Three-way tippers:
The application point of the lifting press must be in
front of the body and payload centre of gravity.
211
7 Types of bodies
7.7 Tipper bodies
7.7.6
Special tipper bodies on standard

chassis
Risk of accident
out easily. Equip the tipper body with a tilt stabiliser

and mount it precisely above the rear axle or the centre of the double axle.
Only operate the vehicle on roads with a firm surface, not on construction sites.
Equip the vehicle with reinforced springs and anti-roll

bars (where these are available from the factory) on
the rear axles. The trailing axle must not be raised during tilting.
Equip the vehicle with reinforced springs and antiroll bars (where these are available from the factory)
on the rear axles. The trailing axle must not be raised
during tilting.
On vehicles with air suspension on the rear axle, this

must be lowered to the basic position during tilting.
This is to be made known to the driver by means of a
suitable information plate located within his field of vision.
On vehicles with air suspension on the rear axle, this

must be lowered to the basic position during tilting.
This is to be made known to the driver by means of
a suitable information plate located within his field of
vision ( page 36).
Semitrailer tractor chassis may not be used.

Under certain conditions, normal chassis may be used
for special tipper bodies such as cement silos, three-way
and rear-end tipper bodies.
The body length should not exceed 5,500 mm on
two-axle vehicles and 6,500 mm on three-axle vehicles.
From the end of the frame to the lifting press, the
mounting frame must be of box-type section, reinforced with a diagonal cross.
The mounting frame must be rigidly connected with
the chassis frame at least as far as the front of the
lifting press.
Position the rear pivot as close as possible to the
rear axle.
Always install an end cross member if the frame is
shortened. On a two-axle vehicle, the rear spring
cross member can be replaced by the end cross
member.
To reduce the risk of the vehicle tipping, the tilting
angle of the body towards the rear must be limited to
35. Therefore, only transport a load that can slide
212
7 Types of bodies
7.8 Roll-off tippers and skip loaders
7.8
Roll-off tippers and skip loaders
These body/equipment mounting directives apply as

appropriate for roll-off tippers and skip loaders.
Provisions must be made by the manufacturer for
the mounting of roll-off tippers and skip loaders
(code CF 2).
The stability of the vehicle must be guaranteed during the loading and unloading procedure.
Comply with the permissible height of the centre of
gravity ( page 68).
For any consultation and advice, see Contacts
( page 33).
i
The front axle must not lift off the ground when the
skip is raised or lowered. Otherwise, the frame
( page 70) could be damaged. Fit supports to the
end of the vehicle, if necessary.
213
7 Types of bodies
7.9 Tank and dry-bulk bodies
7.9
Tank and dry-bulk bodies
Four-point mount at the front

gravity ( page 68).
Tank and dry-bulk bodies must be equipped with a
continuous steel mounting frame.
Make sure that the twisting ability of the chassis
frame is not impaired by the connection between the
body and the mounting frame or between the chassis frame and the mounting frame.
Position the tank or dry-bulk body mounts as close
to the spring brackets as possible.
Position the rigid mounts at the rear to ensure good
handling characteristics.
Do not exceed the distance dimensions from the
centre of the rear axle to the body mount specified
in the table ( page 216). Position front body
mounts as close as possible behind the cab.
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
3 Elastic mount
Three-point mount at the front
214
7 Types of bodies
Rigid mount at the rear
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
4 Bracket
5 Intermediate block
215
7 Types of bodies
Moments of resistance for mounting frames and
body mount distances
Vehicles
Actros
(BM 93X),
Axor
(BM 95X)
Maximum distance from the centre of the rear axle1) to the body
mount behind the rear axle (mm)
(2-axle vehicle)
1,200
70
(3-axle vehicle)
1,000
70
(3-axle vehicle)
1,000
90
1,000
45
(2-axle vehicle)
1,200
70
(3-axle vehicle)
1,000
90
Atego (BM 97X)

Econic
Minimum moment of resistance

for steel mounting frame (Wx) per
longitudinal member (cm3)
Centre of rear axles on 3-axle vehicles.
i
When goods with different specific weights are
transported:
Mark filling levels on the tank so that the permissible
filling capacity is visible.
It is also possible to attach a load indicator to the
rear axle which gives an audible or visual warning in
the cab.
On tank and dry-bulk bodies with separate compartments:
The loading and unloading plans must be attached to
the vehicle where they are clearly visible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends equipping the vehicle
with Telligent roll control whenever possible.
i
It must be guaranteed that the permissible axle loads
are not exceeded and the specified minimum front
axle load is achieved under all loading conditions
( page 70).
216
7 Types of bodies
7.9.1
Tank and dry-bulk bodies without

continuous mounting frames
Equip the vehicle with reinforced springs and antiroll bars.

The mounting frame section must extend beyond the
front and rear of the rear spring brackets (air spring
carriers) on two-axle vehicles for adequate load application.
Provide a base of a minimum of 1,000 mm for the
front mounting frame section.
7.9.2
Platform-mounted tanks
Mount and remove platform-mounted tanks only

when empty.
A vehicle model approval and (in Germany) a test
certificate in accordance with section 6,
paragraphs 1 and 2 of the European Agreement
Concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous
Goods by Road/German Law on the Road Transportation of Hazardous Goods (ADR/GGVS) are required for transporting hazardous goods.
Attaching the tank directly without mounting frame

sections is not permissible.
If a platform-mounted tank is mounted on a platform

or tipper vehicle, the platform-mounted tank must be
connected to the chassis frame by means of a friction-locking connection.
Provide two fastening points in the area of the rear
axle.
The tank must be attached rigidly at the rear and

elastically at the front.
On tipper vehicles, the tipping mechanism must also

be secured against tipping.
Both sections should be designed as an edge profile

(minimum dimensions 100x70x6) with a reinforcement plate and smooth transition.
If there are vehicle vibrations after the body has

been mounted, a mounting frame with the appropriate fastenings is required.
i
gravity ( page 68).
Consult the department responsible in the event of
any modifications to the wheelbase ( page 33).
217
7 Types of bodies
7.10 Vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods
7.10

goods
Risk of injury
Comply with the applicable safety regulations and

country-specific guidelines when handling hazardous
goods.
You could otherwise injure yourself and others.
Include corresponding drawings with all the dimensions
and data on weight in triplicate with the application.
7.10.2 Transport of class 2 and 3 flammable

substances
For tanks or carrier vehicles with:
platform-mounted tanks
batteries of receptacles
tank containers with a capacity greater than
3,000 litres
the following regulations in particular must be complied
with:
1
Electrical equipment Rnn 220 512 to 220 516
Brake system Rnn 220 521 and 220 522 Vehicles for the transport of hazardous goods should always be equipped with ABS, regardless of the
permissible gross vehicle weight.
Fire protection Rnn 220 533 to 220 536
i
Conversion parts on the chassis require a certificate
of endorsement from the relevant department
( page 33).
7.10.1 Legal regulations

For national approval in Germany:
Regulations for the Road Transportation of Hazardous Substances (GGVS)
Guidelines on implementation, e.g. technical guidelines to Regulations for the Road Transportation of
Hazardous Goods TRS 003, must be observed.
For cross-border transport:
European Agreement Concerning the International
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
The necessary scope of equipment for the basic vehicle

can be delivered ex works with the appropriate approval
for vehicles to be registered in Germany. For vehicles
registered outside Germany, technical solutions specific
to each country may also be required.
7.10.3 Vehicles for the transport of aggressive

substances
On vehicles used to transport aggressive substances, all
compressed-air lines, brake lines, brake hoses and electrical wiring must be protected against chemical reaction by the body manufacturer.
It is assumed that the vehicle conversion/body

manufacturer is familiar with these regulations.
218
7 Types of bodies
7.11 Cement mixer trucks
7.11
Cement mixer trucks
Cement mixers may only be mounted on chassis intended for this purpose (cement mixer, tipper chassis). The
mounting frame should be of closed-section type from
the rear up to a position in front of the front mountings
of the drum. The mounting frame should be rigidly connected (form-locking) to the chassis by means of tabs.
The material used is E500 TM.
Retaining fittings can be ordered from the factory (code
CR4). These retaining fittings are only permitted for use
within Europe and only for a maximum gross vehicle
weight of 26 t on 3-axle vehicles and of 32/35 t on
4-axle vehicles.
If the vehicle is to be used outside Europe, or for heavyduty use (e.g. on off-road terrain), or when compliance
with the maximum permissible weights cannot be guaranteed, 1 or 2 crosses in the mounting frame are necessary, according to the container size, or higher moments
of resistance. The necessary consultation will take place
as part of an endorsement check by the relevant department ( page 33).
The container size must be suitable for the chassis loadbearing capacity. It is to be ensured that permissible axle
loads are not exceeded; see Section 4, "Technical
threshold values for planning" ( page 70).
Moments of resistance for mounting frame longitudinal member

Vehicles up to
26 t gross vehicle weight
60 cm
100 cm
130 cm
219
7 Types of bodies
7.12 Semitrailer coupling
7.12
Semitrailer coupling
All model series

Mechanical coupling devices that are suitable for
semitrailers/trailers are determined according to the
drawbar ratio needed ( page 238).
Mount the semitrailer coupling in such a way that the
coupling joint coincides with the semitrailer coupling
point.
Determine the chassis weight by weighing to calculate the distance between the rear axle and the semitrailer coupling point.
Comply with the permissible weight limits, especially
the permissible axle loads.
Comply with the semitrailer coupling manufacturer's
instructions.
Euro semitrailers must comply with the requirements of ISO standard 1726.
Only a semitrailer coupling may be mounted on a
semitrailer tractor chassis. Exceptions must be approved by the relevant department ( page 33).
Semitrailer tractor vehicles are delivered with support brackets on the outside.
The semitrailer coupling plate must be attached directly to these brackets.
Ensure that the trailing arms and spring-loaded
brake cylinders have sufficient clearance at maximum spring compression. If necessary, provide cutouts in the mounting plate around the trailing arms.
Observe the specified dimensions when fastening
the brackets.
On two-axle vehicles used on construction sites, the

total height of the semitrailer coupling and the
mounting plate together must not exceed 300 mm.
If it is necessary to raise the semitrailer coupling, use
an additional mounting frame. If this is not possible,
consult the department responsible ( page 33).
The following information is required: vehicle model,
model series, area of use (e.g. long-distance transport, construction sites), type of semitrailer.
On auxiliary subframes with cross members, the
cross members must also be bolted to the mounting
plate. If this is not possible, additional bolts must be
provided for connecting the mounting plate to the
support brackets.
The permissible coupling load can only be determined after the body has been mounted.
i
Observe the notes on semitrailer tractor chassis in
Section 6, "Modifications to the basic vehicle"
( page 178).
If a semitrailer coupling is fitted at the factory, the
holes for fastening the semitrailer coupling are
spaced at 100 mm intervals. If a coupling is retrofitted, these holes must be located in the centre of the
flange of the support brackets, the interval dimension is 860 mm.
The minimum bolt size for attaching mounting plates
is M 20x1.5 10.9. Use flange head bolts and nuts
that comply with MBN 10105, 10112 and 13023.
Never drill holes in the upper chord of the chassis

frame or the mounting frame, if present, for the purpose of attaching the semitrailer coupling or the
mounting plate. The semitrailer coupling plate must
not rest on the longitudinal frame members; it may
only be secured to the semitrailer brackets.
Bolt the semitrailer coupling and the support bracket
to the mounting plate.
220
7 Types of bodies
Atego (BM 97X)
If a semitrailer coupling is fitted at the factory, the
holes for fastening the semitrailer coupling are provided. If a coupling is retrofitted, these holes must be
located in the centre of the flange of the support
brackets; the interval dimension is 920 mm.
The minimum bolt size for attaching mounting plates
is M 16 x 1.5 10.9. Use flange head bolts and nuts
that comply with MBN 10105, 10112 and 13023.
221
7 Types of bodies
Semitrailer tractor chassis
222
7 Types of bodies
7.12.1 Mounting frame and semitrailer
coupling
All model series
Mounting frame dimensions:
100 x 70 x 7 mm ( page 224)
Attach the semitrailer coupling on the mounting
plate or profile plate with support brackets.
Ensure that the trailing arms and spring-loaded
brake cylinders have sufficient clearance at maximum spring compression. If necessary, provide cutouts in the mounting plate.
The support bracket must extend at least 150 mm
beyond the front and rear of the semitrailer coupling
plate.
The mounting frame must have at least two cross
members in the area of the semitrailer coupling. Extend the mounting frame longitudinal members as
far to the front as possible.
Fasten the longitudinal members rigidly to the chassis frame in the area of the semitrailer coupling (using tabs). Use U-bolts or the standard brackets for all
other mounts.
Provide bolts at the end of the longitudinal frame
member for the longitudinal fastening of the mounting frame. Use the mounting holes already present in
the end cross member for this purpose. Insert the
bolts into the free bolt holes on the end cross member.
Atego (BM 97X)
The mounting frame must have at least one cross
member in the area of the semitrailer coupling. Extend the mounting frame longitudinal members as
far to the front as possible.
Fasten the longitudinal members rigidly to the chassis frame in the area of the semitrailer coupling (using tabs). Provide at least four tabs per side.
223
7 Types of bodies
Using a standard chassis for a semitrailer tractor
vehicle
1 Chassis frame
2 Mounting frame
3 Profile plate/mounting plate
4 Support bracket
224
7 Types of bodies
7.13 Other bodies
7.13
Other bodies
Risk of fire
Snow plough for winter road service vehicles
Mount the mounting plate for the snow plough in accordance with the snow plough manufacturer's assembly instructions. These assembly instructions
must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Ensure that the front windscreen is accessible for
cleaning and that the front towing coupling can be
operated and used.
i
Comply with the maximum permissible front axle load
( page 70).
Other bodies
Apply these body/equipment mounting directives as appropriate for other special-purpose bodies, such as
refuse lorries, municipal vehicles or fire engines.
These body/equipment mounting directives should be
applied as is appropriate for any bodies that are not explicitly listed here. For consultation and advice, see Contacts ( page 33).
225
7 Types of bodies
7.14 Loading tailgate/lifting platform
7.14
Loading tailgate/lifting platform
Risk of injury
People or objects in the slewing range of the loading

tailgate/lifting platform could be injured or damaged
when it is opened and closed. Ensure that there are no
people or objects in the slewing range of the loading
tailgate/lifting platform.
Observe the instructions relevant to safety and the instructions from the loading tailgate/lifting platform
manufacturer.
Loading tailgates/lifting platforms mounted on vehicles in Germany must comply with accident prevention regulations (UVV).
Country-specific laws, directives and registration regulations must be observed.
When attaching a loading tailgate observe the following:
Calculate the load distribution within the vehicle,
taking all special equipment into consideration.
If necessary, shorten the body length and rear chassis overhang accordingly.
Vehicles with an extended frame overhang are only
suitable for attaching a loading tailgate to a certain
degree. Make sure that the points specified above
are observed.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use hydraulic outriggers. If no outriggers can be attached,
a certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible ( page 33).
!
Do not raise the vehicle using the outrigger (damage
to the frame).
i
( page 70).
The permissible rear axle load must not be exceeded.
Check the stability of the vehicle.
Actros (BM 93X)
Supports are not necessary for loading tailgates with a
capacity of up to 20 kN, provided that:
the body or loading tailgate manufacturers draw
attention to the increased risk potential involved
in operating a loading tailgate without supports
in their assembly/operating instructions
an appropriate information plate is attached in a
clearly visible place on the loading tailgate
The body manufacturer is responsible for observing
these instructions.
Reinforced rear springs are necessary on vehicles

with steel suspension.
Extend the mounting frame as far to the front as possible and connect it rigidly to the chassis frame, from
the end of the frame to the front of the bracket for
the rear spring.
When installing electro-hydraulic loading tailgates:
Provide an alternator and batteries with higher output.
226
7 Types of bodies
7.14.1 Mounting without mounting frame
If a mounting frame is not required according to the following table, mount the loading tailgate to the longitudinal frame members.
The design is based on the use of E 500 TM as the material for the mounting frame. If a material with lower
strength is used, e.g. E 380 TM, correspondingly higher
moments of resistance are required. A certificate of endorsement is required from the department responsible
( page 33).
Mounting with mounting frame
227
7 Types of bodies
Mounting without mounting frame
7.14.2 Loading tailgate tables
Atego (BM 97X)

The mounting frames for platforms available from
the factory are designed as follows:
Vehicle type
Page
Actros (BM 93X)
229 230
Dimension
Axor (BM 95X)
231 232
7.. 10.. L
70 x 50 x 3 mm
Atego (BM 97X)
233 236
12.. 15.. L
100 x 50 x 5 mm
Econic
Model
237
The platform for models 12.. 15.. L and also for

models 7.. 10.. L can be ordered using code PU2.
If no mounting frame is required, the loading tailgate
can be attached without any additional reinforcement.
The mounting frame attachment must be converted
from a friction-locking to a rigid connection.
228
7 Types of bodies
Actros (BM 93X)
Wheelbase in mm
18 t 4 x 2
1)
15
1)
20
1)
3,900-4,800
30
1)
5,100-5,700
30
40
10
1)
4,200-5,400
15
1)
5,700-6,300
15
40
4,200-4,500
20
1)
4,800-6,300
20
40
4,200-4,500
30
40
4,800-5,400
30
60
5,700-6,300
30
80
10
1)
15
1)
3,900-4,800
20
1)
5,100-5,700
20
40
3,900-4,200
30
1)
4,500-4,800
30
40
5,100
30
60
5,400-5,700
30
80
3,900-5,700
18 t L 4 x 2
4,200-6,300
3,900-5,700
3,900-5,700
1
x
Minimum moment of
Support
resistance for mounting frame per longitudinal member (cm 3)
10
3,900-5,700
3,900-5,700
18 t 4 x 2 frame overhang extends code

CR2
Lifting force up to
kN
Mounting frame not required

Required
229
7 Types of bodies
Actros (BM 93X)
Wheelbase in mm
Lifting force up to
kN
Minimum moment of
Support
18 t L 4 x 2 frame over- 4,500-6,300

hang extends code CR2 4,500
10
1)
15
1)
4,800-6,300
15
40
4,500-4,800
20
40
5,100-5,400
20
60
5,700-6,300
20
80
4,500
30
60
4,800
30
80
5,100-6,300
30
100
10
1)
15
1)
20
1)
4,500
30
1)
4,800-5,400
30
40
10
1)
15
1)
4,200-4,500
20
1)
4,800-5,100
20
40
4,200-4,500
30
40
4,800-5,100
30
80
20 t 4 x 2
4,500-5,400
4,500-5,400
4,500-5,400
25 t L 6 x 2
4,200-5,100
4,200-5,100
1
x

Required
230
7 Types of bodies
Axor (BM 95X)
Wheelbase in mm
18 t 4 x 2
1)
15
1)
20
1)
3,900-4,800
30
1)
5,100-5,700
30
40
10
1)
4,200-5,400
15
1)
5,700-6,300
15
40
4,200-4,500
20
1)
4,800-6,300
20
40
4,200-4,500
30
40
4,800-5,400
30
60
5,700-6,300
30
80
10
1)
15
1)
3,900-4,800
20
1)
5,100-5,700
20
40
3,900-4,200
30
1)
4,500-4,800
30
40
5,100
30
60
5,400-5,700
30
80
3,900-5,700
18 t L 4 x2
4,200-6,300
3,900-5,700
3,900-5,700
1
x
Minimum moment of
Support
10
3,900-5,700
3,900-5,700
18 t 4 x 2 frame overhang extends code

CR2
Lifting force up to
kN

Required
231
7 Types of bodies
Axor (BM 95X)
Wheelbase in mm
Lifting force up to
kN
Minimum moment of
Support
18 t L 4 x 2 frame over- 4,500-6,300

hang extends code CR2 4,500
10
1)
15
1)
4,800-6,300
15
40
4,500-4,800
20
40
5,100-5,400
20
60
5,700-6,300
20
80
4,500
30
60
4,800
30
80
5,100-6,300
30
100
10
1)
15
1)
20
1)
4,500
30
1)
4,800-5,400
30
40
10
1)
15
1)
4,200-4,500
20
1)
4,800-5,100
20
40
4,200-4,500
30
40
4,800-5,100
30
80
20 t 4 x 2
4,500-5,400
4,500-5,400
4,500-5,400
25 t L 6 x 2
4,200-5,100
4,200-5,100
1
x

Required
232
7 Types of bodies
Atego (BM 97X)
Wheelbase in
mm
712 715
715 L
815 823
815 L 823 L
1
x
Lifting
Minimum moment of
Recommended
force up to resistance for mountmounting frame
kN
ing frame per longitudi- profile mm
nal member (cm3)
Support
3,020-4,220
10
1)
3,020-3,620
15
4,220
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
3,620-4,220
10
1)
3,620
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
4,220
15
25
80 x 60 x 5
3,020-4,820
10
1)
3,020-3,620
15
4,220
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
4,820
15
25
80 x 60 x 5
3,020-3,320
20
3,620
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
4,220
20
25
80 x 60 x 5
4,820
20
45
120 x 60 x 5
3,020-4,220
10
1)
4,820
10
20
60 x 60 x 5
1)
3,020-3,320
15
1)
3,620
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
1)
4,220
15
25
80 x 60 x 5
1)
4,820
15
45
120 x 60 x 5
1)
Recommended
Required
233
7 Types of bodies
Atego (BM 97X)
Wheelbase in
mm
815 L 823 L
917 923
917 L 923 L
1,0171,023
1,017 L 1,023 L
1
x
Lifting
Minimum moment of
Recommended
kN
nal member (cm3)
Support
3,020
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
3,320
20
25
80 x 60 x 5
3,620
20
35
100 x 60 x 5
4,220
20
45
120 x 60 x 5
4,820
20
55
140 x 60 x 5
3,0204,820
10
1)
3,0204,820
15
3,0204,220
20
4,820
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
3,6204,820
10
1)
3,620
15
4,220
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
4,820
15
25
80 x 60 x 5
3,6204,220
20
20
6060 x 5
4,820
20
25
80 x 60 x 5
3,0204,820
10
1)
3,0204,820
15
3,0204,820
20
3,6204,820
10
1)
3,620
15
4,2204,820
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
3,620
20
4,2204,820
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
Recommended
Required
234
7 Types of bodies
Atego (BM 97X)
Wheelbase in
mm
1,215 1,228
1,215 L 1,228 L
1,317 1,328
1
x
Lifting
Minimum moment of
Recommended
kN
nal member (cm3)
Support
3,5605,360
10
1)
3,5604,760
15
5,360
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
3,5604,160
20
4,760
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
5,360
20
25
80 x 60 x 5
x
x
3,5604,760
10
1)
5,360
10
20
60 x 60 x 5
1)
3,5604,160
15
4,760
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
5,360
15
25
80 x 60 x 5
3,5604,160
20
4,760
20
25
80 x 60 x 5
5,360
20
55
140 x 60 x 5
3,5605,360
10
1)
3,5604,760
15
5,360
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
3,5604,160
20
4,760
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
5,360
20
25
80 x 60 x 5
Recommended
Required
235
7 Types of bodies
Atego (BM 97X)
Wheelbase in
mm
1,317 L 1,328 L
1,517 1,528
1,517 L 1,528 L
1
x
Lifting
Minimum moment of
Recommended
kN
nal member (cm3)
Support
3,5604,760
10
1)
5,360
10
20
60 x 60 x 5
1)
3,5604,160
15
4,760
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
5,360
15
35
100 x 60 x 5
3,560
20
4,160
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
4,760
20
45
120 x 60 x 5
5,360
20
55
140 x 60 x 5
3,5605,360
10
1)
3,5604,760
15
5,360
15
20
60 x 60 x 5
3,5604,160
20
4,760
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
5,360
20
35
100 x 60 x 5
3,5604,160
10
1)
4,7605,360
10
20
60 x 60 x 5
1)
3,5604,160
15
4,760
15
25
80 x 60 x 5
5,360
15
45
120 x 60 x 5
3,560
20
4,160
20
20
60 x 60 x 5
4,760
20
45
120 x 60 x 5
5,360
20
75
160 x 60 x 6
Recommended
Required
236
7 Types of bodies
Econic
Wheelbase in mm
18 t L 4x2
26 t 6x2/4
1
x
Minimum moment of
Support
10
1)
15
1)
3,900-4,500
20
1)
5,100-6,300
30
40
10
1)
15
1)
3,900-4,500
20
1)
4,800
20
40
3,900-4,500
30
40
4,800
30
80
3,900-4,500
3,900-4,500
26 t 6x4
Lifting force up to
kN
3,900-4,500
3,900-4,500

Required
237
8 Calculations
8.1 Coupling devices
8.1
Coupling devices
V=a
X2
[kN]
The required size of the trailer and semitrailer coupling

can be calculated from the drawbar ratio.
The drawbar ratio is defined as the theoretical comparable force for the force between the towing vehicle and
the trailer/semitrailer.
V=
V value [kN]
a=
1.8 m /s (for towing vehicles with air suspensions or comparable suspensions)
8.1.1
a=
2.4 m /s (for towing vehicles with other suspensions, e.g. leaf-spring suspension)
X* =
Length of the loading area of the centre-axle

trailer in [m]
l* =
Theoretical drawbar length, measured from the

centre of the axle unit to the centre of the towing
eye in (m)
C=
Permissible weight of the centre-axle trailer without noseweight in [t]
Trailer coupling (without noseweight)
For mechanical coupling devices that are not suitable for

carrying noseweight, apply the drawbar ratio formula:
TR
D=g
T+R
[kN]
l2 C
D=
Drawbar ratio [kN]
g=
Acceleration due to gravity 9.81 m /s
T=
Permissible gross vehicle weight of the towing

vehicle in [t]
* For values calculated x/l < 1, use 1.0.
R=
Permissible gross vehicle weight of trailer with

vertically free-moving towing equipment in [t]
8.1.3
8.1.2
Semitrailer coupling
For mechanical coupling devices that are suitable for

trailers/semitrailers, apply the drawbar ratio formula:
Trailer coupling (with noseweight)
For mechanical coupling devices that are suitable for rigid drawbar trailers/centre-axle trailers, the Dc value and
V value apply. The V value defines the vertical comparable acceleration in the coupling point, depending on the
rear axle suspension of the towing vehicle and a constant factor.
Dc = g
TC
T+C
[kN]
Dc =
Drawbar ratio [kN]
g=
T=
Permissible gross vehicle weight of the towing

vehicle including noseweight in [t]
C=
Permissible gross vehicle weight of the centreaxle trailer without noseweight in [t]
D=g
0.6 T R
TR-U
[kN]
D=
Drawbar ratio [kN]
g=
T=
Permissible gross vehicle weight of semitrailer

tractor including vertical load on coupling in [t]
R=
Permissible gross vehicle weight of semitrailer

including vertical load on coupling in [t]
U=
Vertical load on coupling in [t]
238
8 Calculations
8.2 Axle load calculation
8.2
Axle load calculation
An axle load calculation is required to optimise the entire

vehicle (vehicle and body). It is only possible to match
the body to the truck if the vehicle is weighed before any
work on the body is carried out. The weights determined
in the weighing process are used for the axle load calculation.
The moment theorem is used to distribute the weight of
the equipment on the front and rear axles. All distances
relate to the centre front axle (theoretical centre). Indicate the weight with the mathematically correct symbol
and enter it in a table. Use the result for determining the
optimum positioning of the body.
It has proved useful to make the following calculations:
Weight
+ (plus) is everything when the vehicle is laden
(minus) is everything that the vehicle can unload
weights
Calculating the weight distribution on the front and rear

axle using the formula:
GHA =
G HA
Gcomponent a
[kg]
= Changes in weight on rear axle in [kg]
Gcomponent = Component weight in [kg]

a=
Axle distance to the theoretical centre of the

front axle in [mm]
R=
Theoretical wheelbase in [mm]
GVA =
G VA
Gcomponent - GHA
[kg]
= Changes in weight on front axle in [kg]
Gcomponent = Component weight in [kg]

G HA
= Changes in weight on rear axle in [kg]
Axle distance
+ (plus) is everything behind the centre of the front axle
(minus) is everything in front of the centre of the front
axle
239
8 Calculations
8.3 Tipping limit
8.3
Tipping limit
You can find the chassis values for the tipping limit calculation for the entire vehicle in the body manufacturer
information portal ( page 38). In the MBAS Web menu,
go to Additional Information, open the tipping limit calculation and select the vehicle.
Please contact the relevant department if you have any
questions ( page 33).
8.4
Technical wheelbase
8.4.1
Technical wheelbase calculation for

3-axle vehicles
You require the following values to calculate the technical wheelbase RI:
R = vehicle wheel base measured from the centre of axle
1 to the centre of axle 2
HA = rear axle distance
G2 = permissible axle load of 2nd axle
according to weight code
G3 = permissible axle load of 3rd axle
3-axle vehicle
The following formula is used to calculate the technical

wheelbase:
Ri = R+
(HA*G3)
(G2+G3)
If G2 is equal to G3, the formula becomes simpler:

Ri = R+
(HA)
(2)
240
8 Calculations
8.4 Technical wheelbase
8.4.2
Technical wheelbase calculation for

4-axle vehicles
You require the following values to calculate the technical wheelbase RI:
R = vehicle wheelbase measured from the centre of axle
1 to the centre of axle 3
The following formula is used to calculate the technical

wheelbase:
Ri = R -
Ri = R -
G1 = permissible axle load of 1st axle

G2 = permissible axle load of 2nd axle
G3 = permissible axle load of 3rd axle
(G1+G2)
(HA*G4)
(G3+G4)
If G1 is equal to G2, the formula becomes simpler:
VA = front axle distance

HA = rear axle distance
(VA*G2)
VA
2
(HA*G4)
(G3+G4)
If G3 is also equal to G4, the following formula results:

Ri = R -
VA
2
G4 = permissible axle load of 4th axle

HA
2
8 Calculations
4-axle vehicle
241
9 Technical data
9.1 PSM 3 parameter data record
9.1
PSM 3 parameter data record
000 Programmable special module PSM 3 Code

010 A 000 446 XX 46/ZGS XXX
With body interface complying with
ISO 11992
and trailer interface
(AUF and ANH)
020 A 000 446 XX 46/ZGS XXX
With body interface complying with
ISO 11898
and trailer interface
(AUF and ANH)
Programmable special module PSM
010 Power take-off 1 (NA 1)
010
015
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
NA 1 request (X3 15/4)

NA 1 request (FCAN)
NA 1 request (AUF)
NA 1 request (ANH)
Request as most recent engagement
condition
Neutral position
Parking brake
Speed
Speed
Tachograph signal zero
Engine speed
Engine speed
Idle position
Lower level reached
Emergency transmission gearshift not
operated
FCAN event
Designation (FCAN event)
Invert result (FCAN event)
Threshold value (FCAN event)
NA 1 feedback (X3 15/7)
Power take-off function
Delivery
EM8
EM8 +
Unit
EM9
Deliv- Corery rection
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
730
NA 1 control valve (X4 18/ 16)

Transmission input speed
Delay after clutch disengaged
Clutch disengaged
Minimum NA 1 speed limitation
Maximum NA 1 speed limitation
NA1 torque limitation
NA1 torque limitation
NA 1 road speed limitation
Control output (X4 18/ 13)
ADR request
Splitter group
Splitter setting
Gear change inhibitor
Engine brake lock
Clutch control (EAS)
Clutch pedal inhibitor (X4 18/11)
Clutch control (X4 18/12)
Delay before clutch control
NA 1 operating time record
rpm
s
rpm
rpm
Nm
km/h
km/h
rpm
242
9 Technical data
010
015
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
Unit

NA 2 request (FCAN)
NA 2 request (AUF)
NA 2 request (ANH)
condition
Neutral position
Parking brake
Speed
Speed
Engine speed
Engine speed
Idle position
Lower level reached
operated
FCAN event
km/h
rpm
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
730

Clutch disengaged
NA 2 torque limitation
ADR request
Splitter group
Splitter setting
Engine brake lock
Clutch pedal inhibitor (X4 18/11)
Clutch control (X4 18/12)
rpm
s
rpm
rpm
Nm
km/h
243
9 Technical data
010
015
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
Unit

NA 3 request (FCAN)
NA 3 request (AUF)
NA 3 request (ANH)
condition
Neutral position
Parking brake
Speed
Speed
Engine speed
Engine speed
Idle position
Lower level reached
operated
FCAN event
km/h
rpm
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
680
690

Clutch disengaged
ADR request
Splitter group
Splitter setting
Engine brake lock
rpm
s
rpm
rpm
Nm
km/h
244
9 Technical data
040 Camshaft-driven power take-offs
(MOT 1/2)
010
015
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
MOT 1 request (X3 15/10)

MOT 1 request (FCAN)
MOT 1 request (AUF)
MOT 1 request (ANH)
MOT 2 request (X1 18/14)
MOT 2 request (AUF)
MOT 2 request (ANH)
condition
Neutral position
Parking brake
Speed
Speed
Engine speed
Engine speed
Idle position
FCAN event
Unit
km/h
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
Minimum speed limitation

Minimum MOT 1 speed limitation
Maximum speed limitation
Maximum MOT 1 speed limitation
Torque limitation
MOT 1 torque limitation
Road speed limitation
MOT 1 road speed limitation
ADR request
Engine brake lock
MOT 1 operating time record
MOT 2 operating time record
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
Nm
Nm
km/h
km/h
rpm
245
9 Technical data
050 ADR enabling and accelerator pedal Unit
lock
010
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
NA 1 service brake
NA 2 service brake
NA 3 service brake
MOT 1 service brake
MOT 2 service brake
NA 1 parking brake
NA 2 parking brake
NA 3 parking brake
MOT 1 parking brake
MOT 2 parking brake
NA 1 neutral position
MOT 1 neutral position
MOT 2 neutral position
Speed
Speed
Idle position
Time frame for enabling function
Delay after clutch engaged
ADR request (X2 18/17)
ADR request (AUF)
FCAN event
Control in the event of signal failure
(FCAN event)
300 Threshold value (FCAN event)
km/h
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
680
690
700
710
720
730
740
750
760
770
780
790
800
810
820
830
Minimum speed limitation

Maximum speed limitation
Torque limitation
Road speed limitation
NA 1 accelerator pedal lock
MOT 1 accelerator pedal lock
MOT 2 accelerator pedal lock
NA 1 regulator type
NA 2 regulator type
NA 3 regulator type
MOT 1 regulator type
MOT 2 regulator type
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
km/h
km/h
km/h
km/h
km/h
246
9 Technical data
060 Pulsed and ramped mode
Unit
010 Wave height in pulsed mode
/min/
p
020 Ramped increase in ramped mode
/min/
s
030 Switch-over from pulsed mode to

ramped mode
070 Constant speeds and maximum

speed limitations
Unit
010
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
500
510
Activate constant speed 1 (X2 18/1)

Deactivation delay (X2 18/ 1)
Activate constant speed 1 (AUF)
Constant speed 1
Constant speed 2
Constant speed 3
Maximum speed limitation 1 (X2 18/ 1)
Maximum speed limitation 1 (AUF)
Maximum speed limitation 1
Speed approval (X2 18/17)
Speed approval (AUF)
Output constant speed
Output maximum speed limitation
rpm
080 Increase, reduce or switch off speed Unit
010
020
030
040
050
060
Increase speed (X2 18/ 4)

Increase speed (AUF)
Reduce speed (X2 18/5)
Reduce speed (AUF)
Switch off speed (X2 18/ 6)
Switch off speed (AUF)
090 Hand throttle
Unit
500 Output hand throttle speed

510 Minimum hand throttle speed
520 Maximum hand throttle speed
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
rpm
247
9 Technical data
100 Engine start
010
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
500
510
520
530
540
550
Unit
Engine start (X2 18/7..X2 18/10)

Engine start (X2 18/14)
Engine start (AUF)
Engine start (ANH)
Engine start until engine running
Single verification of input conditions
Neutral position
Parking brake
Parking brake (X4 18/ 5..X4 18/ 8)
Starter inhibitor not activated
(X2 18/9..X2 18/ 12)
Starter inhibitor not activated (AUF)
Starter inhibitor not activated (ANH)
Power take-off NA 1 not engaged
Output engine start
Clutch disengaged
Clutch pedal inhibitor (X4 18/ 11)
Clutch control (X4 18/ 12)
110 Engine stop
010
020
030
040
050
130 Deactivate control console
010
020
030
040
050
060
500
510
520
Unit
Unit
Unit
Deactivate control console (X2 18/18)

Deactivate control console (AUF)
Deactivate control console (ANH)
Parking brake not applied
Neutral position not engaged
Tachograph signal not zero
Engine start stored in control console
Engine stop stored in control console
Starter inhibitor stored in control
console
140 Special emergency running

mechanism
010 Emergency running mechanism
020 Emergency running mechanism
150 Reverse gear inhibitor
Unit
Unit
Engine stop (X2 18/8..X2 18/ 11)

Engine stop (X2 18/15)
Engine stop (AUF)
Engine stop (ANH)
Engine stop until engine not running
120 Starter inhibitor
010
020
030
040
050
060
010 Step plate switch

(X2 18 /13..X2 18/16)
020 Step plate switch (AUF)
030 Step plate switch (ANH)
040 Clutch not disengaged
050 Reverse gear (X4 18/4...X4 18/7)
060 Reverse gear
500 Engine stop and starter inhibitor
510 Engine stop until engine not running
520 Control warning buzzer
530 Frequent-stop brake (X4 18/ 12)
Starter inhibitor (X2 18/9..X2 18/12)

Starter inhibitor (AUF)
Starter inhibitor (ANH)
Neutral position not preselected
Clutch not disengaged
248
9 Technical data
160 Road speed limitation
Unit

(X2 18/13..X2 18/ 16)
500 Road speed limitation
km/h
170 Reverse gear inhibitor
Unit
Unit

(X2 18/13...X2 18/16)
500 Control in the event of signal failure
180 Gear information
500
510
520
530
Neutral position selected (X4 18/15)

Reverse gear engaged (X4 18/ 9)
1st gear engaged (X4 18/10)
2nd gear engaged (X4 18/14)
190 Remote clutch control
Unit
010 Remote clutch control

(X4 18 /4..X4 18/7)
020 Remote clutch control (AUF)
030 Remote clutch control (ANH)
040 Neutral position
050 Parking brake
060 Idle position
070 FCAN event
080 Designation (FCAN event)
090 Invert result (FCAN event)
(FCAN event)
500 Gear change inhibitor
510 Clutch control (EAS)
520 Wait until clutch engaged
530 Clutch pedal inhibitor (X4 18/11)
540 Clutch control (X4 18/12)
550 Delay before clutch control
249
9 Technical data
200 Control warning buzzer
010
020
030
040
050
060
500
Unit
NA 1 feedback
NA 2 feedback
NA 3 feedback
Warning buzzer request (X1 18/14)
Warning buzzer request (AUF)
Control warning buzzer
210 Power take-off engaged
010
020
030
500
240 Road speed signal (PPM)
Unit
500 Road speed signal (X1 18/5)

510 Substitute value in emergency operation
km/h
250 Target engine torque value signal

(PWM)
Unit
NA 1 feedback
NA 2 feedback
NA 3 feedback
Power take-off engaged (X4 18/ 14)
220 Power train externally open
010
020
030
500
Unit

Power train externally open
230 Engine speed signal (PPM)
Unit
500 Engine speed signal (X1 18/4)

520 Number of pulses per engine revolution
rpm
500 Target engine torque value signal

(X1 18 /6)
520 Minimum signal value
530 Maximum signal value
540 Minimum pulse duty factor
550 Maximum pulse duty factor
Unit
Nm
Nm
Nm
1/250
1/250
260 Limit load control signal (PWM)
Unit
500 Limit load control signal (X1 18/7)

520 Minimum signal value
1/250
530 Maximum signal value
/50,00
0
540 Minimum pulse duty factor

550 Maximum pulse duty factor
1/250
/50,00
0
1/250
ppr
250
9 Technical data
270 PWM 1 signal
010
500
510
520
530
540
550
Unit

PWM 1 signal (X1 18/8)
Substitute value in emergency operation
Minimum signal value
Maximum signal value
Minimum pulse duty factor
Maximum pulse duty factor
300 Retarder deactivation
010
020
030
040
050
500
1/250
1/250
010
500
510
520
530
540
550
290 Fan control (PWM)
500 Fan control

510 Fan control
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
1/250
Unit

PWM 2 signal (X1 18/9)
Substitute value in emergency operation
Minimum signal value
Maximum signal value
Minimum pulse duty factor
Maximum pulse duty factor
ABS intervention (X4 18/4..X4 18/ 7)

ABS intervention
Accelerator pedal applied
Retarder lever position
Retarder deactivation (X4 18/10)
310 Retarder status

280 PWM 2 signal
Unit
320 Motor running, alternator working

correctly
1/250
010 Engine running

020 Alternator working correctly
500 Engine running, alternator working correctly (X4 18/ 9)
1/250
1/250
Unit
010 Retarder status (X4 18 /5..X4 18/8)
330 ABS fault
500 ABS fault present (X4 18/13)

340 Kickdown
500 Kickdown (X4 18/ 11)

510 Engine brake lock
251
9 Technical data
350 Engine brake lock
Unit
050 Input (X2 18/ 3)

060
010 Engine brake lock (X2 18/ 17)

070
360 Control reversing lamps
Unit
080
090
010 Control reversing lamps

(X4 18/4..X4 18/ 7)
100
370 Shift to neutral
Unit
010
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
Shift to neutral (X4 18/ 4..X4 18/7)

Shift to neutral (AUF)
Service brake
Parking brake
Speed
Speed
Engine speed
Engine speed
Idle position
FCAN event
(FCAN event)
500 Shift to neutral
510 Shift to neutral (X4 18/ 15)
380 Switching input characteristics
010 Inputs switching to positive

or earth
020 Input (X1 18/14)
030 Input (X2 18/1)
040 Input (X2 18/2)
110
120
130
140
150
km/h
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
rpm
250
Unit
260
270
Positive/
earth
Input (X2 18/ 4)
Positive/
earth
Input (X2 18/ 5)
Positive/
earth
Input (X2 18/ 6)
Positive/
earth
Input (X2 18/ 7..X2 18/10) monitored
Input (X2 18/ 8..X2 18/11) Monitored
Input (X2 18/ 13..X2 18 /16) Monitored
Input (X2 18/ 14)
Positive
Input (X2 18/ 15)
Positive
Input (X2 18/ 17)
Positive/
earth
Input (X2 18/ 18)
Positive
Input (X3 15/ 4)
Positive
Input (X3 15/ 5)
Positive
Input (X3 15/ 6)
Positive
Input (X3 15/ 7)
Earth
Input (X3 15/ 8)
Earth
Input (X3 15/ 9)
Earth
Input (X3 15/ 10)
Positive
Flank analysis (X2 18/8..X2 18/11)
Flank analysis (X2 18/15)
Positive/
earth
Positive
Positive/
earth
Positive/
earth
252
9 Technical data
390 Switching output characteristics
010
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
Output switch-on delay (X4 18/ 9)

Output switch-off delay (X4 18/9)
Output switch-off threshold (X4 18/ 9)
Invert output (X4 18/9)
Unit
s
s
V
s
s
V
s
s
V
s
s
V
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400
Output switch-on delay (X4 18/14)

Output switch-off delay (X4 18/ 14)
Output switch-off threshold (X4 18/14)
Invert output (X4 18/ 14)
s
s
V
s
s
V
s
s
V
s
s
V
s
s
V
s
V
253
9 Technical data
400 Assignment of FCAN event to
switching output
010 Designation (X4 18/ 9)
020 Invert event (X4 18/ 9)
(X4 18/9)
040 Threshold value (X4 18/9)
050 Activate output (X4 18/9)
(X4 18/10)
(X4 18/11)
(X4 18/12)
(X4 18/13)
Unit
260 Designation (X4 18/14)

270 Invert event (X4 18/14)
(X4 18 /14)
290 Threshold value (X4 18/ 14)
300 Activate output (X4 18/ 14)
(X4 18 /15)
(X4 18 /16)
(X4 18 /17)
(X4 18 /18)
254
9 Technical data
410 Freely programmable function
010
020
030
040
050
060
070
080
090
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
Input block E1
Input block E1
FCAN event (E1.1)
Designation (E1.1)
Invert event (E1.1)
(E1.1)
Threshold value (E1.1)
FCAN event (E1.2)
Designation (E1.2)
Invert event (E1.2)
(E1.2)
Threshold value (E1.2)
Activate switching input (E1.3)
Invert input (E1.3)
(E1.3)
Switching input (E1.3)
Invert input (E1.4)
(E1.4)
Invert input (E1.5)
(E1.5)
Invert input (E1.6)
(E1.6)
Invert input (E1.7)
(E1.7)
Unit
330 Activate switching input (E1.8)

340 Invert input (E1.8)
(E1.8)
360 Switching input (E1.8)
370 Input block E2
380 Input block E2
390 FCAN event (E2.1)
400 Designation (E2.1)
410 Invert event (E2.1)
(E2.1)
430 Threshold value (E2.1)
440 FCAN event (E2.2)
450 Designation (E2.2)
460 Invert event (E2.2)
(E2.2)
480 Threshold value (E2.2)
(E2.3)
(E2.4)
(E2.5)
(E2.6)
255
9 Technical data
410 Freely programmable function
Unit

(E2.7)
(E2.8)
730 Output block A3
740 Output block A3
750 Activate FCAN output (A3.1)
760 Designation (A3.1)
770 Invert (2-bit info only) (A3.1)
780 8/16-bit info link (A3.1)
790 Threshold value (A3.1)
800 Activate FCAN output (A3.2)
810 Designation (A3.2)
820 Invert (2-bit info only) (A3.2)
830 8/16-bit info link (A3.2)
840 Threshold value (A3.2)
850 Activate switching output (A3.3)
860 Switching output (A3.3)
870 Activate switching output (A3.4)
880 Switching output (A3.4)
420 Body and trailer interface
010
020
030
040
430 Display parking brake symbol
Unit
Unit
010 Display parking brake symbol

KOM/COTEL communication interface:
010 Basic settings
010
020
030
040
Unit
Communications computer (KOM)

Telematics interface (COTEL)
Body information (AUF)
Trailer information (ANH)
020 Vehicle data

Delivery
010 Vehicle model
020 Transmission model
Notes concerning the parameter data record:
Abbreviations used in parameter designations
ABS
Anti-lock braking system
ADR
Working speed control
ANH
Trailer interface
AUF
Body interface
COTEL
Telematics interface
EAS
Electronic drive control
FCAN
Vehicle CAN
KOM
Communications computer
MOT
Camshaft-driven power take-off
NA
Power take-off
PPM
Pulse-pause modulation
PWM
Pulse width modulation
Body interface (AUF)

Single-wire compatibility (AUF)
Trailer interface (ANH)
Single-wire compatibility (ANH)
256
9 Technical data
9.2

(NA)
9.2.1
Mounting directives for the transmission-driven power take-off
Actros (BM 93X)

Key
Transmission model + sales code
Power take-off designation
Main power take-off
Auxiliary power take-off
Total output
Transmission ratio with low-speed transmission group (splitter setting) nNA = iNA X nengine
Transmission ratio with high-speed transmission group (splitter setting) nNA = iNA X nengine
Maximum torque in Nm at the power take-off
Continuous output in kW at the power take-off at an engine speed of 1,000 rpm
Rotation direction when viewed in the direction of travel
a) Anti-clockwise
b) Clockwise
Maximum weight moment in Nm with a directly-flanged hydraulic pump
1)
NA
NA1
NA2
NA1+NA2
L
H
T
P (1000)
P (1700)
D
1) G210-16/14.20-0.83 (code GC3)

NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
NA 121-1b
N04
0.85
1.03
700
63
106
63
106
NA 121-2b
N07
0.82
0.99
400
42
70
42
70
NA 121-2c
N05
0.82
0.99
400
42
70
42
70
NB0
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
75
128
NB1
1.41
1.70
509
75
128
75
128
NB2
1.81
2.19
394
75
128
75
128
NB3
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
75
128
NB4
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
140
238
NB5
1.41
1.70
509
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
140
238
NB6
1.81
2.19
394
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
140
238
NB7
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
25
140
238
NB8
1.41
1.70
509
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
25
140
238
NB9
1.81
2.19
394
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
25
140
238
NA 123-10b
NA 123-10c
NA 12311b/1b
NA 12311b/1c
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
30
40
257
9 Technical data
1) G210-16/14.20-0.83 (code GC3)
NA1
NA
NA 124-10b
NA 124-10c
NA 12411b/1b
NA 12411b/1c
NA 125-10b
NA 12511b/2c
NA 12511c/2c
NA2
M
NA1+NA2
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
ND0
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
75
128
ND1
1.41
1.70
509
75
128
75
128
ND2
1.81
2.19
394
75
128
75
128
ND3
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
75
128
ND4
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
140
238
ND5
1.41
1.70
509
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
140
238
ND6
1.81
2.19
394
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
140
238
ND7
1.11
1.35
646
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
25
140
238
ND8
1.41
1.70
509
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
25
140
238
ND9
1.81
2.19
394
75
128
0.85
1.03
600
65
110
25
140
238
NF0
1.09
1.31
600
68
116
68
116
NF1
1.52
1.84
542
87
147
87
147
NF2
2.04
2.47
406
87
147
87
147
NC0
1.09
1.31
600
68
116
0.82
0.99
400
42
70
25
110
186
NC1
1.52
1.84
542
87
147
0.82
0.99
400
42
70
25
129
217
NC2
2.04
2.47
406
87
147
0.82
0.99
400
42
70
25
129
217
NC3
1.09
1.31
600
68
116
0.82
0.99
400
42
70
25
110
186
40
40
1) G211-16/17.0-1.0 (code GD3); 1) G231-16/ 17.0-1.0 (code GH6)

NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
NA 121-1b
N04
0.71
0.85
700
52
90
52
90
NA 121-2b
N07
0.68
0.82
400
34
58
34
58
NA 121-2c
N05
0.68
0.82
400
34
58
34
58
NB0
0.93
1.11
646
63
107
63
107
NB1
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
63
107
NB2
1.50
1.81
394
63
107
63
107
NB3
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
63
107
NB4
0.93
1.11
646
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
117
197
NB5
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
117
197
NB6
1.50
1.81
394
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
117
197
NB7
0.93
1.11
646
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
NB8
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
NB9
1.50
1.81
394
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
NA 123-10b
NA 123-10c
NA 12311b/1b
NA 12311b/1c
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
30
40
258
9 Technical data
1) G211-16/17.0-1.0 (code GD3); 1) G231-16/ 17.0-1.0 (code GH6)
NA1
NA
NA 124-10b
NA 124-10c
NA 12411b/1b
NA 12411b/1c
NA 125-10b
NA 12511b/2c
NA 12511c/2c
NA2
M
NA1+NA2
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
ND0
0.93
1.11
646
63
107
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
63
107
ND1
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
63
107
ND2
1.50
1.81
394
63
107
63
107
ND3
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
63
107
ND4
0.93
1.11
646
63
107
ND5
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
ND6
1.50
1.81
394
63
107
ND7
0.93
1.11
646
63
107
ND8
1.17
1.41
509
63
ND9
1.50
1.81
394
NF0
0.90
1.09
NF1
1.27
1.52
NF2
1.70
NC0
40
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
117
197
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
117
197
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
117
197
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
600
57
97
57
97
542
72
124
72
124
2.04
406
72
124
72
124
0.90
1.09
600
57
97
0.68
0.82
400
34
58
25
91
155
NC1
1.27
1.52
542
72
124
0.68
0.82
400
34
58
25
106
182
NC2
1.70
2.04
406
72
124
0.68
0.82
400
34
58
25
106
182
NC3
0.90
1.09
600
57
97
0.68
0.82
400
34
58
25
91
155
40
1) G240-16/11.72-0.69 (code GC2)

NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
NA 121-1b
N04
1.03
1.24
700
76
129
76
129
NA 121-2b
N07
0.99
1.19
400
50
85
50
85
NA 121-2c
N05
0.99
1.19
400
50
85
50
85
NB0
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
91
155
NB1
1.70
2.05
509
91
155
91
155
NB2
2.19
2.63
394
91
155
91
155
NB3
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
91
155
NB4
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
NB5
1.70
2.05
509
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
NB6
2.19
2.63
394
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
NB7
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
25
169
288
NB8
1.70
2.05
509
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
25
169
288
NB9
2.19
2.63
394
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
25
169
288
NA 123-10b
NA 123-10c
NA 12311b/1b
NA 12311b/1c
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
30
40
259
9 Technical data
1) G240-16/11.72-0.69 (code GC2)
NA1
NA
NA 124-10b
NA 124-10c
NA 12411b/1b
NA 12411b/1c
NA 125-10b
NA 12511b/2c
NA 12511c/2c
NA2
M
NA1+NA2
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
ND0
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
91
155
ND1
1.70
2.05
509
91
155
91
155
ND2
2.19
2.63
394
91
155
91
155
ND3
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
91
155
ND4
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
ND5
1.70
2.05
509
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
ND6
2.19
2.63
394
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
ND7
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
ND8
1.70
2.05
509
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
ND9
2.19
2.63
394
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
169
288
NF0
1.31
1.58
600
83
140
83
140
NF1
1.84
2.22
542
105
179
105
179
NF2
2.47
2.97
406
105
179
105
179
NC0
1.31
1.58
600
83
140
0.99
1.19
400
50
85
25
133
225
NC1
1.84
2.22
542
105
179
0.99
1.19
400
50
85
25
155
264
NC2
2.47
2.97
406
105
179
0.99
1.19
400
50
85
25
155
264
NC3
1.31
1.58
600
83
140
0.99
1.19
400
50
85
25
133
225
40
40
1) G260-16/9.80-0.57 (code GC1)

NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
NA 121-1b
N04
1.24
1.50
700
91
155
91
155
NA 121-2b
N07
1.19
1.44
400
60
103
60
103
NA 121-2c
N05
1.19
1.44
400
60
103
60
103
NB0
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
109
186
NB1
2.05
2.48
509
109
186
109
186
NB2
2.62
3.18
394
109
186
109
186
NB3
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
109
186
NB4
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
203
346
NB5
2.05
2.48
509
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
203
346
NB6
2.62
3.18
394
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
203
346
NB7
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
25
203
346
NB8
2.05
2.48
509
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
25
203
346
NB9
2.62
3.18
394
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
25
203
346
NA 123-10b
NA 123-10c
NA 12311b/1b
NA 12311b/1c
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
30
40
260
9 Technical data
1) G260-16/9.80-0.57 (code GC1)
NA1
NA
NA 124-10b
NA 124-10c
NA 12411b/1b
NA 12411b/1c
NA 125-10b
NA 12511b/2c
NA 12511c/2c
NA2
M
NA1+NA2
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
ND0
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
109
186
ND1
2.05
2.48
509
109
186
109
186
ND2
2.62
3.18
394
109
186
109
186
ND3
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
109
186
ND4
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
203
346
ND5
2.05
2.48
509
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
203
346
ND6
2.62
3.18
394
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
203
346
ND7
1.62
1.96
646
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
25
203
346
ND8
2.05
2.48
509
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
25
203
346
ND9
2.62
3.18
394
109
186
1.24
1.50
600
94
160
25
203
346
NF0
1.58
1.91
600
100
169
99
169
NF1
2.22
2.68
542
126
215
126
215
NF2
2.97
3.59
406
126
215
126
215
NC0
1.58
1.91
600
100
169
1.19
1.44
400
60
103
25
160
272
NC1
2.22
2.68
542
126
215
1.19
1.44
400
60
103
25
186
318
NC2
2.97
3.59
406
126
215
1.19
1.44
400
60
103
25
186
318
NC3
1.58
1.91
600
100
169
1.19
1.44
400
60
103
25
160
272
40
40
261
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 121-1B
Code
N04
Standard vehicles (except all-wheel-drive vehicles)
Transmission shifted by..... when fitted

with:
(BA9) retarder
(G02) torque converter and clutch unit
(N56/N57) engine-driven power take-off
mm
25
281
175
262
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 121-1B
Code
N04

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
263
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 121-1B
Code
N04

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
264
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 121-1B
Code
N04

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
265
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 121-2B
Code
N07

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
266
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 121-2B
Code
N07

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
267
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 121-2B
Code
N07

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
268
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 121-2B
Code
N07

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
269
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 121-2C
Code
N05

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
270
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 121-2C
Code
N05

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
271
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 121-2C
Code
N05

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
272
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 121-2C
Code
N05

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
273
9 Technical data

L
Engine
V6
NA
NA 123-10B
Code
NB0,
NB1, NB2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
274
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 123-10B
Code
NB0,
NB1, NB2
Transmission shifted by..... when fitted with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
275
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 123-10B
Code
NB0,
NB1, NB2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
276
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 123-10B
Code
NB0,
NB1, NB2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
277
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 123-10C
Code
NB3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
278
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 123-10C
Code
NB3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
279
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 123-10C
Code
NB3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
280
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 123-10C
Code
NB3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
281
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 123-11B/1B
Code
NB4, NB5,
NB6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
282
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 123-11B/1B
Code
NB4, NB5,
NB6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
283
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 123-11B/1B
Code
NB4, NB5,
NB6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
284
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 123-11B/1B
Code
NB4, NB5,
NB6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
285
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 123-11B/1C
Code
NB7, NB8,
NB9

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
286
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 123-11B/1C
Code
NB7, NB8,
NB9

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
287
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 123-11B/1C
Code
NB7, NB8,
NB9

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
288
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 123-11B/1C
Code
NB7, NB8,
NB9

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
289
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 124-10B
Code
ND0,
ND1, ND2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
290
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 124-10B
Code
ND0,
ND1, ND2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
291
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 124-10B
Code
ND0,
ND1, ND2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
292
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 124-10B
Code
ND0,
ND1, ND2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
293
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 124-10C
Code
ND3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
294
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 124-10C
Code
ND3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
295
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 124-10C
Code
ND3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
296
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 124-10C
Code
ND3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
297
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 124-11B/1B
Code
ND4,
ND5, ND6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
298
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 124-11B/1B
Code
ND4,
ND5, ND6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
299
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 124-11B/1B
Code
ND4,
ND5, ND6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
300
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 124-11B/1B
Code
ND4,
ND5, ND6

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
301
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 124-11B/1C
Code
ND7,
ND8, ND9

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
302
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 124-11B/1C
Code
ND7,
ND8, ND9

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
303
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 124-11B/1C
Code
ND7,
ND8, ND9

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
304
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 125-10B
Code
NF0, NF1,
NF2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
305
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 125-10B
Code
NF0, NF1,
NF2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
306
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 125-10B
Code
NF0, NF1,
NF2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
307
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 125-11B/2C
Code
NC0,
NC1, NC2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
308
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
NA
NA 125-11B/2C
Code
NC0,
NC1, NC2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
309
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
NA
NA 125-11B/2C
Code
NC0,
NC1, NC2

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
310
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 125-11C /2C
Code
NC3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
311
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NA 125-11C /2C
Code
NC3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
312
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NA 125-11C /2C
Code
NC3

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
281
175
313
9 Technical data
Axor (BM 94X)
Key
Main power take-off
Auxiliary power take-off
Total output
a) Anti-clockwise
b) Clockwise
Maximum weight moment in Nm with a directly-flanged hydraulic pump
1)
NA
NA1
NA2
NA1+NA2
L
H
T
P (1000)
P (1700)
D
1) G211-16/17.00-1.00 (code GD3)

NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
NA 121-1b
NO4
0.71
0.85
700
52
90
NA 121-2c
NO5
0.68
0.82
400
34
58
NB0
0.93
1.11
646
63
107
NB1
1.17
1.41
509
63
107
NB2
1.50
1.81
394
63
NB3
1.17
1.41
509
NB7
0.93
1.11
646
NB8
1.17
1.41
NB9
1.50
1.81
NA 123-10b
NA 123-10c
NA 12311b/1b
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
52
90
34
58
63
107
63
107
107
63
107
63
107
63
107
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
509
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
394
63
107
0.71
0.85
600
54
90
25
117
197
30
40
314
9 Technical data
1) G221-9/ 16.15-1.00 (code GD5)
NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
NA 121-1b
NO4
0.77
700
57
96
NA 121-2c
NO5
0.74
400
50
85
NB0
1.01
646
68
116
NB1
1.27
509
68
116
NB2
1.63
394
68
NB3
1.27
509
NB7
1.01
NB8
1.27
NB9
1.63
NA 123-10b
NA 123-10c
NA 12311b/1b
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
57
96
50
85
68
116
68
116
116
68
116
68
116
68
116
646
68
116
0.77
600
78
133
25
146
249
509
68
116
0.77
600
78
133
25
146
249
394
68
116
0.77
600
78
133
25
146
249
30
40
1) G240-16/11.72-0.69 (code GC2)

NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
NA 121-1b
NO4
1.03
1.24
700
76
129
NA 121-2c
NO5
0.99
1.19
400
50
85
NB0
1.35
1.62
646
91
155
NB1
1.70
2.05
509
91
155
NB2
2.19
2.63
394
91
NB3
1.35
1.62
646
NB7
1.35
1.62
NB8
1.70
2.05
NB9
2.19
2.63
NA 123-10b
NA 123-10c
NA 12311b/1b
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
76
129
50
85
91
155
91
155
155
91
155
91
155
91
155
646
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
25
169
288
509
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
25
169
288
394
91
155
1.03
1.24
600
78
133
25
169
288
30
40
315
9 Technical data

Engine
R6 (OM 457)
1
NA
NA 121-1B
Code
N04
A1
1583
B1
315
C1
141
NA1
D1
58
E1
267
BW1
6
Maximum angular offset of the propeller shaft tube

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
316
9 Technical data
N60.00-2074-31

Engine
R6 (OM 457)
1
NA
NA 121-2C
Code
N05
A1
1624
B1
354
C1
212
NA1
D1
95
E1
172
H1
30
Maximum permissible weight moment at the hydraulic pump flange (in Nm)

with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
317
9 Technical data

Engine
R6 (OM 457)
NA
NA 123-10B
R6 (OM 457)
NA 123-10C
1
2
Code
A1
NB0,
1631
NB1, NB2
NB0,
1605
NB1, NB2
B1
359
C1
240
NA1
D1
100
358
240
100
E1
165
BW1
6
H2
191
40


with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
318
9 Technical data
N60.00-2073-31

NA
Engine
Code
R6 (OM 457) NA 123-11B/1C NB7,
NB8,
NB9
1
2
NA1
NA2
1
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 BW
A2 B2 C2 D2
1631 359 240 100 165 6 1665 319 140 58
E2 H2
131 25


with:
(BA9) retarder
mm
25
319
9 Technical data
Axor (BM 95X)
Key
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
X
A
B
C

Vehicle sales designation
Drive options
1 Lower drive (intermediate transmission)
Footnote1: except all-wheel-drive vehicles
2 Upper drive
3 2 drives (lower and upper)
Footnote1: except all-wheel-drive vehicles
4 Transmission-independent power take-off NMV
5 In extension to drive shaft
6 Intermediate transmission integrated in the drive train
7 2 drives (upper with flange, lower for connection to Meiller pump only)
8 2 drives (upper for connection to Meiller pump only, lower only with flange)
9 Upper drive for connection to Meiller pump only
10 Upper drive and lower drive for connection to Meiller pump only
power take-off: drive speed at the power take-off nNA = iNA x nengine with low-speed transmission group
power take-off: drive speed at the power take-off nNA = iNA x nengine with high-speed transmission group
Continuous output at the power take-off in kW at engine speed rpm
Footnote1: power take-off with fan wheel = 82/2,400 (option)
Footnote2: power take-off with fan wheel = 92/2,400 (option)
Footnote3: without oil cooler
Maximum transferable power output: power take-off 1 + power take-off 2 in kW
Maximum transferable torque at the power take-off in Nm with low-speed transmission group
Footnote1: maximum permissible engine speed 1,900 rpm
Maximum transferable torque at the power take-off in Nm with high-speed transmission group
Footnote1: maximum permissible engine speed 1,900 rpm
a) Anti-clockwise
b) Clockwise
Distance from the rear edge of the coupling flange to the centre of the front axle
LK vehicles with GFM 350 heavy duty clutch (standard on all-wheel-drive fire engines): +32 mm
NA 4/120-11 without oil cooler: 30 mm
NA 60 and NA 61 with fittings for oil cooler (code N55): +28 mm
Distance from the centre of the coupling flange to the top edge of the chassis frame
Distance from the centre of the coupling flange to the centre of the transmission flange
320
9 Technical data
NS42-2b, NS42-2c
I) S5-42/ 5.7
II
III
Code
IV
A1
1215
1215L
NS42-2b
N29
0.87
52/2,100
270
687.5
368.5
188
NH1
1.44
60/2,100
190
687.5
368.5
188
N25
0.87
52/2,100
270
671
438.5
164.5
NS42-2c
VI
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
321
9 Technical data
N71/1b, N71/1c
I) 9S-75/ 13.1 (code G05)
II
1217K
1317K
1517K
1317KO
1317LKO
1323KO
1323LKO
1317A
1317AK
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
N71/1b
N21
0.62
70/2,300
N71/1c
N22
0.62
70/2,300
VII/I
VIII
IX
A1
A2
B1
500
1,148
322.5
175
500
1,089
319
175
B2
C1
C2
322
9 Technical data
NA 60-1b/ 1c
NA 61-10b
NA 60-2b/ 2c upper
NA 61-11
NA 60-11b/ b, b/c, c/c
323
9 Technical data
I) G60-6 /9.0 (code GC5)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
1215K
1217
1317
1517
1217L
1317L
1517L
1217K
1317K
1517K
1317A
1317AK
NA60-1b
NL5
0.45
60/2,300
600
1,073
297.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.45
60/2,300
600
1,016
294.5
120
NA60-2b
NM4
0.79
76/2,300
400
1,092
382.5
152.4
NM5
1.32
90/2,300
283
1,092
382.5
152.4
NA60-2c
NN2
0.79
76/2,300
400
1,035
379.5
NA61-10b
NS0
0.96
92/2,300
400
1,134.5
140.5
123
NS2
1.54
92/2,300
248
1,134.5
140.5
123
NS3
2.01
92/2,300
190
1,134.5
140.5
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,182
1,100.5 387
216.5
152.4
156.7
1.32
90/2,300
90
283
1,182
1,100.5 387
216.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
152.4
123
c1
NN8
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,124
1,100.5 384
216.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,124
1,068.5 384
215
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
0.96
92/2,300
115
400
1,134.5
140.5
123
NX3
1.54
92/2,300
115
248
1,134.5
140.5
123
NX4
2.01
92/2,300
115
190
0.45
43/2,300
115
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
1,134.5
1,150
140.5
301.5
123
120
Lower take-off can be individually engaged and disengaged.

Both take-offs can be individually engaged and disengaged.
324
9 Technical data
I) G85-6/ 6.70 (code GC6)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
1223
1323
1523
1223L
1323L
1523L
1323LS
1523K
NA60-1b
NL5
0.62
90/2,300
600
1,073
297.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.62
90/2,300
600
1,016
294.5
120
NA60-2b
NM4
1.08
120/2,300
457
1,092
382.5
152.4
NM5
1.82
115/2,300
264
1,092
382.5
152.4
NA60-2c
NN2
1.08
120/2,300
457
1,035
379.5
NA61-10b
NS0
1.31
115/2,300
364
1,134.5
140.5
123
NS1
1.65
115/2,300
289
1,134.5
140.5
123
NS2
2.11
115/2,300
226
1,134.5
140.5
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,182
1,100.5 387
216.5
152.4
156.7
1.82
120/2,300 120
275
1,182
1,100.5 387
216.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
152.4
123
c1
NN8
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,124
1,100.5 384
216.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,124
1,068.5 384
215
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
1.31
115/2,300 130
364
1,134.5
140.5
123
NX2
1.65
115/2,300 130
289
1,134.5
140.5
123
NX3
2.11
115/2,300 130
226
0.62
60/2,300
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
130
1,134.5
1,150
140.5
301.5
123
120

325
9 Technical data
I) G85-6/ 6.70 (code GC6)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
1225F
1225AF
1325F
1328F
1528F
NA60-1b
NL5
0.62
90/2,300
600
1073.5
264.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.62
90/2,300
600
1,016
261.5
120
NA60-2b
NM4
1.08
120/2,300
457
1,092
349.5
152.4
NM5
1.82
115/2,300
264
1,092
349.5
152.4
NA60-2c
NN2
1.08
120/2,300
457
1,035
346.5
NA61-10b
NS0
1.31
115/2,300
364
1,134.5
107.5
123
NS1
1.65
115/2,300
289
1,134.5
107.5
123
NS2
2.11
115/2,300
226
1,134.5
107.5
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,182
1,100.5 354
183.5
152.4
156.7
1.82
120/2,300 120
275
1,182
1,100.5 354
183.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
152.4
123
c1
NN8
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,124
1,100.5 351
183.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,124
1,168.5 351
182
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
1.31
115/2,300 130
364
1,134.5
107.5
123
NX2
1.65
115/2,300 130
289
1,134.5
107.5
123
NX3
2.11
115/2,300 130
226
0.62
60/2,300
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
130
1,134.5
1,150
107.5
268.5
123
120

326
9 Technical data
Chelsea NA277-b
I) Allison WT MD3060 (code GB1, GB2)
II
1217
1317
1517
1217L
1317L
1517L
1223
1323
1523
1223L
1323L
1523L
1317KO
1317LKO
1323KO
1323LKO
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
NA277-b
NJ4
1.03
28/1,000
NJ5
1.29
26/1,000
VII/I
VIII
IX
A1
A2
B1
B2
C1
2711
718
287
240
2441
718
287
240
C2
Torque (in continuous operation)

40% increase in torque permissible for brief operation < 5 minutes
15% increase in torque permissible for continuous operation in the case of fire engines.
327
9 Technical data
Chelsea NA859-b, c, d
II
1225F
1325F
1225AF
1325AF
1525AF
1328F
1528F
1328AF
1528AF
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
NA859-b
NL1
1.43
158/2,300
NL2
1.71
NL3
2.08
VII/I
VIII
IX
A1
A2
B1
460
725.5
14
178.7
158/2,300
385
725.5
14
178.7
158/2,300
330
725.5
14
178.7
B2
C1
C2
328
9 Technical data
II
III
1823
1823L
1828
1828L
2528L
Code
NA859-b
NL1
NL2
NA859-c
NA859-d
2
2
V
1.43
1.71
VI
VII
34/1,000
28/1,000
VII/I
VIII
A1
325
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
683
179
270
683
179
683
179
NL3
2.08
24/1,000
230
NL4
1.43
34/1,000
3251
708
179
NL6
1.71
28/1,000
2701
708
179
40/1,000
3851
708
179
47/1,000
661
179
NL7
2
IV
NL9
2
2
1.20
0,94
450
C2

SAE B 2-bore flange with SAE C shaft
Separate body/equipment approval must be obtained for output speeds > 2,500 rpm.
!
Notes concerning the attachment of pumps
The maximum permitted static bending moment
through the pump is 90 Nm for power take-offs connected directly to the pump (c, d).
If the weight moment is higher, the pump must be
supported on the transmission.
The following principle applies: hydraulic pumps
weighing more than 25 kg or measuring more than
300 mm in length require additional bracket support
on the transmission.
329
9 Technical data
NA 60-1b/ 1c
NA 61-10b
NA 60-2b/ 2c upper
NA 61-11
NA 60-11b/ b, b/c, c/c
330
9 Technical data
I) G85-6/ 6.70 (code GC6)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
1823
1823L
1823LS
1823K
NA60-1b
NL5
0.62
90/2,300
600
1022.5
285.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.62
90/2,300
600
965
282.5
120
NA60-2b
NM0
1.08
120/2,300
457
1046.5
269
156.7
1.82
115/2,300
264
1046.5
269
156.7
984
368
NM1
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
NA60-2c
NN2
1.08
120/2,300
457
NA61-10b
NS0
1.31
115/2,300
264
1,084
128.5
123
NS1
1.65
115/2,300
289
1,084
128.5
123
NS2
2.11
115/2,300
226
1,084
128.5
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,131
1,050
375.5
205
152.4
156.7
1.82
120/2,300 120
275
1,131
1,050
375.5
205
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
152.4
123
c1
NN8
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,073
1,050
372.5
205
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,073
1,018
372.5
205
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
1.31
115/2,300 130
364
1,084
128.5
123
NX2
1.65
115/2,300 130
289
1,084
128.5
123
NX4
2.11
115/2,300 130
226
0.62
60/2,300
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
130
1,084
1099.5
128.5
290
123
120

331
9 Technical data
I) G85-6/ 6.70 (code GC6)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
1823AK
NA60-1b
NL5
0.62
90/2,300
600
1022.5
225.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.62
90/2,300
600
965
222.5
120
NA60-2b
NM0
1.08
120/2,300
457
1046.5
209
156.7
NM1
1.82
115/2,300
264
1046.5
209
156.7
NA60-2c
NN2
1.08
120/2,300
457
984
308
NA61-10b
NS0
1.31
115/2,300
264
1087
68.5
123
NS1
1.65
115/2,300
289
1087
68.5
123
NS2
2.11
115/2,300
226
1087
68.5
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,134
1,053
315.5
145
152.4
156.7
1.82
120/2,300 120
275
1,134
1,053
315.5
145
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
152.4
123
c1
NN8
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,076
1,053
312.5
145
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,076
1,053
312.5
145
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
1.31
115/2,300 130
364
1,087
68.5
123
NX2
1.65
115/2,300 130
289
1,087
68.5
123
NX4
2.11
115/2,300 130
226
0.62
60/2,300
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
130
1,087
1102.5
68.5
230
123
120

332
9 Technical data
NA 121-1b, 2b, 2c
NA 124-11
NA 123-10b, 10c
NA 125-10b/R, c /R
NA 123-11
NA 125-11
NA 124-10b, 10c
NMV 200
333
9 Technical data
I) G100-12/ 10.0 (code GC7)
II
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
VIII
IX
A1
1828
1828L
1828LS
1828K
2523L
2528L
2628
NA121-1b
NO4
0.42
0.51
106/2,300
1,050
865
1,220
305
140.5
NA 121-2c
NO5
0.61
0.74
71/2,300
400
400
1,207
341
212
NA123-10b
NB1
0.69
0.84
107/2,300
644
529
1,227
347
240
0.89
1.08
107/2,300
499
411
1,227
347
240
NB2
VII/I
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
NA123-10c
NB3
0.69
0.84
107/2,300
644
529
1,201
345
240
NA123-11
NB5
0.69
0.84
107/2,300 181
644
529
1,227
347
240
0.89
1.08
107/2,300 181
499
411
61/2,300
181
600
181
NB6
0.42
NA123-11
NB8
NB9
NA124-10b
ND1
ND2
1,356
1,356
0.51
74/2,300
600
0.69
0.84
107/2,300 181
644
529
0.89
1.08
107/2,300 181
499
411
61/2,300
181
600
181
0.42
1,227
347
312
312
1,227
1,356
1,356
140.5
347
1,227
240
140.5
240
347
312
240
140.5
0.51
74/2,300
600
0.69
0.84
107/2,300
644
529
1,234
312
206
140.5
181.7
0.89
1.08
107/2,300
499
411
1,234
206
181.7
NA124-10c
ND3
0.69
0.84
107/2,300
644
529
1,208
205
181.7
NA124-11
ND5
0.69
0.84
107/2,300 181
644
529
1,234
206
181.7
0.89
1.08
107/2,300 181
499
411
1,234
206
181.7
600
ND6
0.42
NA124-11
ND8
ND9
61/2,300
181
0.51
74/2,300
181
0.69
0.84
107/2,300 181
0.89
1.08
0.42
NA125-10b
1,356
312
600
1,356
312
644
529
1,234
206
181.7
107/2,300 181
499
411
1,234
206
181.7
600
61/2,300
181
0.51
74/2,300
181
1.01
1.22
146/2,300
1.48
1.80
1.96
1.01
NC1
NC2
NF0
NF1
NF2
NC0
140.5
140.5
1,261
307
600
1,261
307
600
497
1,243
52
150.5
146/2,300
410
337
1,243
52
150.5
2.38
146/2,300
309
255
1,243
52
150.5
1.22
146/2,300 193
600
497
1,243
52
150.5
1.48
1.80
146/2,300 193
410
337
1,243
52
150.5
1.96
2.38
146/2,300 193
309
255
1,243
52
150.5
39/2,300
193
400
47/2,300
193
0.40
0.49
400
140.5
140.5
1,295
346
212.9
1,295
346
212.9
334
9 Technical data
I) G211-12/ 17.00 (code GD3)
II
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
VIII
IX
A1
2628K
2628B
NA121-1b
NO4
0.71
0.85
120/2,300
VII/I
700
600
1,336.5
A2
B1
310
B2
140.5
NA121-2b
NO7
0.68
0.82
79/2,300
400
400
1,414.5
351
212
NA121-2c
NO5
0.68
0.82
79/2,300
400
400
1,377.5
NA123-10b
NB0
0.93
1.11
144/2,300
646
543
1,384.5
354
240
NB1
1.17
1.40
144/2,300
509
429
1,384.5
354
240
NB2
1.50
1.80
144/2,300
394
334
1,384.5
354
240
349.5
C1
C2
212
NA123-10c
NB3
1.17
1.40
144/2,300
509
429
1,359
352.5
240
NA123-11
NB4
0.93
1.11
144/2,300 205
646
543
1,384.5
354
240
NB5
1.17
1.40
144/2,300 205
509
429
1,384.5
354
240
NB6
1.50
1.80
144/2,300 205
394
334
1,384.5
354
240
103/2,300 205
600
0.71
NA123-11
1,513.5
319.5
1,513.5
319.5
646
543
1,384.5
354
240
144/2,300 205
509
429
1,384.5
354
240
144/2,300 205
394
334
103/2,300 205
600
120/2,300 205
0.93
1.11
144/2,300 205
NB8
1.17
1.40
NB9
1.50
1.80
NB7
0.71
NA124-10b
b
600
0.85
1,384.5
1,418.5
1,418.5
104.5
104.5
354
314.5
240
140.5
0.85
120/2,300 205
600
0.93
1.11
144/2,300
646
543
1,391.5
213
181.7
ND1
1.17
1.40
144/2,300
509
429
1,391.5
213
181.7
ND2
1.50
1.80
144/2,300
394
334
1,391.5
213
181.7
ND0
314.5
104.5
NA124-10c
ND3
1.17
1.40
144/2,300
509
429
1,366
212
181.7
NA124-11
ND4
0.93
1.11
144/2,300 205
646
543
1,391.5
213
181.7
ND5
1.17
1.40
144/2,300 205
509
429
1,391.5
213
181.7
ND6
1.50
1.80
144/2,300 205
394
334
1,391.5
213
103/2,300 205
600
0.71
0.85
120/2,300 205
600
181.7
1,513.5
319.5
140.5
1,513.5
319.5
140.5
335
9 Technical data
I) G211-16/ 17.00 (code GD3)
II
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
VIII
IX
2628K
2628B
NA124-11
ND7
0.93
1.11
144/2,300 205
646
543
1392
213
181.7
ND8
1.17
1.40
144/2,300 205
509
429
1392
213
181.7
ND9
1.50
1.80
144/2,300 205
394
334
103/2,300 205
600
0.71
0.85
NA125-10b
NA125-11
NF0
150.5
165/2,300
542
460
1,400
59
150.5
165/2,300
406
344
1,400
59
150.5
205
600
600
1,400
59
150.5
1.52
165/2,300 205
542
460
1,400
59
150.5
2.04
165/2,300 205
406
344
65/2,300
205
400
0.82
79/2,300
205
1.08
156/2,300 205
600
65/2,300
205
400
79/2,300
205
1.52
2.04
0.90
1.08
NC1
1.27
NC2
1.70
0.68
0.82
NA125-10bR
NR1
NR2
0.90
1.08
1.27
1.52
165/2,300
314.5
1,400
1,452.5
400
1,452.5
600
140.5
59
351
351
1,373
150.5
212.9
212.9
58
150.5
1,452.5
351
400
1,452.5
351
212.9
600
600
1,390
18
278
542
460
1,390
18
278
212.9
NA125-10cR
NR5
0.90
1.08
600
600
1,181
NA125-11bR
NR8
0.90
1.08
205
600
600
1,145
1,390
18
278
278
NA125-11cR
NR8
0.90
1.08
205
600
600
1,181
1,390
18
278
278
NMV200
N57
1.09
205/2,300
1,000
862.5
23.51
1.48
205/2,300
743
862.5
23.51
N56
181.7
140.5
59
1.70
0.90
1,418.5
213
314.5
C2
1,400
1.27
10
1,418.5
C1
NF2
NC3
1382
B2
0.68
NA125-11
B1
600
NF1
A2
600
1.08
120/2,300 205
A1
600
0.90
NC0
VII/I
278
Above the top edge of the frame.
336
9 Technical data
Atego (BM 97X)
Key
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
X
A
B
C

Drive options
Footnote 1: except all-wheel-drive vehicles
2 Upper drive
Power take-off: drive speed at the power take-off nNA = iNA x nengine with low-speed transmission group
Power take-off: drive speed at the power take-off nNA = iNA x nengine with high-speed transmission group
Footnote 1: power take-off with fan wheel = 82/ 2,400 (option)
Footnote 3: without oil cooler
Footnote 1: maximum permissible engine speed 1,900 rpm
a) Anti-clockwise
b) Clockwise
337
9 Technical data
NS42-b, NS42-2b, NS42-2c

I) S5-42/ 5.7
II
III
Code
IV
A1
712
812
715
815
NS42-2b
N29
0.87
VI
VII
52/2,100
VII/I
VIII
270
IX
747.5
A2
B1
333.5
188
NS42-b
NH1
1.44
60/2,100
190
747.5
333.5
188
NS42-2c
N25
0.87
52/21,00
270
731
403.5
164.5
B2
C1
C2
338
9 Technical data
N71/1b, N71/1c
I) 9S-75/ 13.1 (code G05)
II
817K
917K
917KO
823K
923K
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
N71/1b
N21
0.62
70/2,300
N71/1c
N22
0.62
70/2,300
VII/I
VIII
IX
A1
A2
B1
500
1,208
282.5
175
500
1,149
279
175
B2
C1
C2
339
9 Technical data
N36/10
I) 6S-850/ 6.7 (code GF9)
II
III
Code
IV
815F
N36/10
N43
1.72
VI
VII
120/2,300
VII/I
VIII
290
IX
A1
1,022
A2
B1
94.5
B2
C1
C2
110
340
9 Technical data
I) G56-6 /6.29-0.79 (code GC4)
NA1
NA2
NA
Code
P (1,000)
P (2,300)
NA 56-1c
NO4
0.56
600
35
81
25
NA 56-2b
NA2
0.98
450
46
106
NA3
0.98
450
46
106
NA4
0.98
450
46
106
NA5
0.98
450
46
106
NA 56-2c
NA1+NA2
H
P (1,000)
P (2,300)
P (1,000)
P (2,300)
46
106
25
46
106
25
46
106
341
9 Technical data
NA 60-1b/ 1c
NA 61-10b
NA 60-2b/ 2c upper
NA 61-11
NA 60-11b/ b, b/c, c/c
342
9 Technical data
I) G60-6 /9.0 (code GC5)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
712
812
715
815
817
917
1017
NA60-1b
NL5
0.45
60/2,300
600
1,133
257.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.45
60/2,300
600
1,076
254.5
120
NA60-2b
NM4
0.79
76/2,300
400
1,152
342.5
152.4
NM5
1.32
90/2,300
283
1,152
342.5
152.4
NA60-2c
NN2
0.79
76/2,300
400
1,095
339.5
NA61-10b
NS0
0.96
92/2,300
400
1,194.5
100.5
123
NS2
1.54
92/2,300
248
1,194.5
100.5
123
NS3
2.01
92/2,300
190
1,194.5
100.5
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,242
1,160.5 347
176.5
152.4
156.7
1.32
90/2,300
90
283
1,242
1,160.5 347
176.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
152.4
123
c1
NN8
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,184
1,160.5 344
176.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,184
1,128.5 344
175
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
0.96
92/2,300
115
400
1,194.5
100.5
123
NX3
1.54
92/2,300
115
248
1,194.5
100.5
123
NX4
2.01
92/2,300
115
190
0.45
43/2,300
115
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
1,194.5
1,210
100.5
261.5
123
120

343
9 Technical data
I) G60-6 /9.0 (code GC5)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
917AF
1017A
1017AK
NA60-1b
NL5
0.45
60/2,300
600
1073.5
257.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.45
60/2,300
600
1016
254.5
120
NA60-2b
NM4
0.79
76/2,300
400
1092
342.5
152.4
NM5
1.32
90/2,300
283
1,092
342.5
152.4
NA60-2c
NN2
0.79
76/2,300
400
1,035
339.5
NA61-10b
NS0
0.96
92/2,300
400
1,134.5
100.5
123
NS2
1.54
92/2,300
248
1,134.5
100.5
123
NS3
2.01
92/2,300
190
1,134.5
100.5
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,182
1,100.5 347
176.5
152.4
156.7
1.32
90/2,300
90
283
1,182
1,100.5 347
176.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
152.4
123
c1
NN8
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,124
1,100.5 344
176.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
0.79
76/2,300
90
400
1,124
1,068.5 344
175
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
0.96
92/2,300
115
400
1,134.5
100.5
123
NX3
1.54
92/2,300
115
248
1,134.5
100.5
123
NX4
2.01
92/2,300
115
190
0.45
43/2,300
115
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
1,134.5
1,150
100.5
261.5
123
120

344
9 Technical data
I) G85-6/ 6.7 (code GC6)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
823
923
1023
NA60-1b
NL5
0.62
90/2,300
600
1,133
257.5
120
NA60-1c
NL8
0.62
90/2,300
600
1,076
254.5
120
NA60-2b
NM4
1.08
120/2,300
457
1,152
342.5
152.4
NM5
1.82
115/2,300
264
1,152
342.5
152.4
NA60-2c
NN2
1.08
120/2,300
457
1,095
339.5
NA61-10b
NS0
1.31
115/2,300
364
1,194.5
100.5
123
NS2
1.65
115/2,300
289
1,194.5
100.5
123
NS3
2.11
115/2,300
226
1,194.5
100.5
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,242
1,160.5 347
176.5
152.4
156.7
1.82
120/2,300 120
275
1,242
1,160.5 347
176.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11b, b1
NN5
NN6
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
152.4
123
c1
NN8
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,184
1,160.5 344
176.5
152.4
156.7
NA60-11c, c1
NP1
10
1.08
120/2,300 120
457
1,184
1,128.5 344
175
152.4
156.7
NA61-11b, c2
NX1
1.31
115/2,300 130
364
1,194.5
100.5
123
NX3
1.65
115/2,300 130
289
1,194.5
100.5
123
NX4
2.11
115/2,300 130
226
0.62
60/2,300
400
NA60-11b,
1
2
VI
130
1,194.5
1,210
100.5
261.5
123
120

345
9 Technical data
NA121-1b, 2c
NA125-10
I) G100-12/ 10 (code GC7)

II
III
Code
IV
VI
VII
VIII
IX
A1
823
923
1023
NA121-1b
NO4
0.42
0.51
106/2,300
VII/I
1,050
865
1,330.5
A2
B1
NA121-2c
NO4
0.61
0.74
71/2,300
400
400
1,331
NA125-10
NF0
1.01
1.22
146/2,300
600
497
1,353.5
28
155.5
NF1
1.48
1.80
146/2,300
410
337
1,353.5
28
155.5
NF2
1.96
2.38
146/2,300
309
255
1,353.5
28
155.5
C1
C2
140.5
313
B2
276
212
346
9 Technical data
Econic
Key
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
X
A
B
C

Drive options
2 Upper drive
Power take-off: drive speed at the power take-off nNA = iNA x nengine with low-speed transmission group
Power take-off: drive speed at the power take-off nNA = iNA x nengine with high-speed transmission group
Footnote 3: without oil cooler
a) Anti-clockwise
b) Clockwise
347
9 Technical data
Muncie CS12
I) Allison WT MD 3060 (code GB1, GB2)
II
III
Code
IV
A1
1823LL
1828LL
2628LL
CS12-b
NT1
0.98
45/1,000
4272
790
373
257
NT2
1.16
42/1,000
3982
790
373
257
NT3
1.29
38/1,000
365
790
373
257
NT4
0.98
45/1,000
4272
790
380
254
NT5
1.16
42/1,000
3982
790
380
254
NT6
1.29
38/1,000
3652
790
380
254
NU1
0.98
45/1,000
4272
755
371
257
NU2
1.16
42/1,000
3982
755
371
257
NU3
1.29
38/1,000
3652
755
371
257
NU4
0.98
45/1,000
4272
755
379
254
NU5
1.16
42/1,000
398
755
379
254
NU6
1.29
38/1,000
3652
755
379
254
CS12-c
1
2
VI
VII
VII/I
VIII
IX
A2
B1
B2
C1
C2
Mounted at the bottom on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel.
Mounted at the bottom on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel.
Separate body/equipment approval must be obtained

for output speeds > 2,500 rpm.
!
Notes concerning the attachment of pumps
The maximum permitted static bending moment
through the pump is 90 Nm for power take-offs connected directly to the pump (DIN 5462).
If the weight moment is higher, the pump must be

supported on the transmission.
The following principle applies: hydraulic pumps
weighing more than 25 kg or measuring more than
300 mm in length require additional bracket support
on the transmission.
348
9 Technical data
9.2.2
Dimensions of the power take-off

coupling flange
Transmission
Power take-off
Code
Number of
holes
G28-5/ 5.0
NA28-2b
Standard
90
74.5
47e8
6.0
2.1-0.1
8A12
G60-6/ 9.2;
G85-6/ 6.7
NA60/ 61
Standard
100
840.1
57h8
7.0
2.3-0.15
8C12
G100-12/ 10.0
N121
Standard
100
840.1
57h8
7.0
2.3-0.10
8C12
NA123
Standard
120
101.5
75h7
7.0
2.3-0.2
8C12
NK2
100
840.1
57-0.05
6.5
2.0-0.1
8C12
Standard
120
101.5
75h7
7.0
2.3-0.15
8C12
NK2
100
840.1
57-0.05
6.5
2.0-0.1
8C12
Standard
120
101.5
75h7
7.0
2.3-0.15
8C12
NK3
120
101.5
75h7
7.0
2.3-0.2
10C12
NA124
NA125
349
9 Technical data
Transmission
Power take-off
Code
Number of
holes
G210-16
N121
Standard
100
840.1
57h8
7.0
2.0-0.15
8C12
to
NA123
Standard
120
101.5
57h7
7.0
2.3-0.2
8C12
NK2
100
840.1
57-0.05
6.5
2.0-0.1
8C12
Standard
120
101.5
75h7
7.0
2.3-0.15
8C12
NK2
100
840.1
57-0.05
6.5
2.0-0.1
8C12
Standard
120
101.5
57h7
7.0
2.3-0.15
8C12
NK3
120
101.5
75h7
7.0
2.3-0.2
10C12
NMV200(1)1
Standard
120
100
11+0.2
S5-42/5.72
NS42/2b
Standard
100
840.1
57h7
7.0
2.0-0.1
8C12
6S 850
N36/ 10
Standard
100
840.1
57h7
7.0
2.0-0.1
8C12
9S-75/13.16
N71/ 1b
Standard
100
840.1
57h7
7.0
2.0-0.1
8C12
Allison WT MD
NA277-b; NA859-b
Standard
100
840.1
57h7
7.0
2.0-0.1
8C12
G260-16
NA124
NA125
15.3
Cross-toothed flange.
350
9 Technical data
9.3
Engine-driven power take-off (NMV)
1)
NA3
L
H
T
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
D
Key
a) anti-clockwise
b) clockwise
351
9 Technical data
Actros (BM 93X)
1) G210-16/ 14.20-0.83 (code GC3); 1) G211-16/17.0-1.0 (code GD3); 1) G231-16/17.0-1.0 (code GH6)
1) G240-16/ 11.72-0.69 (code GC2) 1) G260-16/ 9.80-0.57 (code GC1)
NA3
NA
Code
NMV200
N57
N56
P (1,000)
P (1,700)
1.09
2,000
228
388
1.48
1,500
232
395

Engine
V6
1
S1
NA
NMV200
Code
N56, N57
352
9 Technical data

Engine
V6
1
NA
NMV200
Code
N56, N57
353
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NMV200
Code
N56, N57
354
9 Technical data

Engine
V8
1
NA
NMV200
Code
N56, N57
355
A
Access to the compressed-gas reservoirs . . . . . . . 98
Accident prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adaptation of a crew cabin in the cab
(code F07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Aggressive substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Air consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Attachments and additional equipment . . . . . . . 119
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Axle load calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
B
Ball hitch coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Base module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Basic vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 80
Batteries of receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Battery maintenance and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Belt drive, engine power take-off at
the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Bending radii
Plastic lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Bodies
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Body mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Body types
Municipal vehicles, fire engines, refuse lorries . . 225
Bolted connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Bracket mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Brake hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105, 179
C
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cable routing preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cables and lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Cement mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Cement mixer trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Centre-axle trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Lowered trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 35
Chassis frame
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Necessary modification work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Chassis frame material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Checking for leaks in the compressed-gas
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 97
Checking the compressed-gas reservoir . . . . . . . . 98
Class 2 and 3 flammable substances . . . . . . . . . 218
Clearance for assemblies and the cab . . . . . . . . . . 71
Composite compressed-gas reservoir . . . . . . . 94, 97
Compressed-air lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Compressed-gas reservoir shut-off valve . . . . 96, 98
Compressed-gas reservoir support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Compressed-gas reservoir support brackets . . . . 98
Compressor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Connections for brake system and electrical
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Corrosion protection measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Crew cabin in the cab (code F07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
D
Damage prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Delivery of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Demountable bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Dimensions of the power take-off coupling
flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Dimensions, weights and total vehicle height . . . 46
Double clamping ring connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Drilling work on the chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Dry-bulk bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 217
E
Electrical consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
above 10 amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
up to 10 amps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 131, 179
Electrical wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Electromagnetic compatibility, EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
End cross member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
356
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Engine power take-off at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Belt drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Propeller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Engine power take-off at the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Resilient drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rigid drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Engine-driven power take-off (NMV) . . . . . . 161, 351
Ensuring traceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Euro 3 exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Euro 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Euro 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Euro 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Exhaust system/ silencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Explanations of cable plug (pin assignment) . . . 136
F
Fire engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame extensions
Standard chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame shortening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
186
115
116
116
132
120
G
Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
German Employer's Liability Insurance
Association safety regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Gross weight of tractor /trailer combination . . . . 76
H
Hazardous goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Height of centre of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
I
Inert gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 97
Installation of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installation of propeller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Types of angle offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
L
Leading axle/trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Leaf springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Legal claim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Legal regulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Lifting press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Lifting trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Loading crane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Behind the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Rear-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Loading tailgate
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228237
Loading tailgate /lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Lowered trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 176
M
Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Maintenance instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Marking of pipes according to conveyed
substance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Maximum permissible air consumption . . . . . . . . . 66
Mercedes star and logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Mobile communications systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Modification to the wheelbase
by cutting the longitudinal frame member . . . . . . 109
Modifications to the basic vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Modifications to the frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Modifications to the wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
By moving the rear axle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Shortening of wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Wheelbase extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Mounting directives for the transmission-driven
power take-off
Actros (BM 93X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257313
Atego (BM 97X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337346
Axor (BM 94X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314319
Axor (BM 95X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320336
Econic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347348
357
Mounting frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 197, 201, 228

Material quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Mounting frame and semitrailer coupling . . . . . 223
Mounting frame as floor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Mounting frame material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Mudguards and wheel housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Municipal vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
N
Natural gas high-pressure lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Noise insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
O
Open-jaw coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Other bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
P
Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 97
Permissible gross vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Permission to make modifications to the
wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Planning of bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Platform and demountable bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Platform body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Platform-mounted tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 218
Power supply - auxiliary consumers . . . . . . . . . . 134
Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Engine-driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 351
Transmission-driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 257
Power take-off (NA) output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 98
Power take-off coupling flange
(dimensions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349350
Precautions for the removal of the
compressed-gas reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Preparation for storing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Product liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Programmable special module (PSM) . . . . . . . . . 150
Propeller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Propeller shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
PSM 3 parameter data record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Q
Quality assurance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Quick-release lock for demountable bodies . . . 193
R
Rear module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rear underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Refuse lorries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Regulations and codes of practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reinforcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Removable loading crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Removal instructions for compressed-gas
reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Removal of compressed-gas reservoirs . . . . . . . . . 96
Removed compressed-gas reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Reprocessing components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Resilient drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Retrofitting an automatic transmission . . . . . . . 130
Rigid drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Roll-off tippers and skip loaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Rotating signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Routing lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
S
Safety fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Safety when working with natural gas . . . . . . . . . . 95
Seats and bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Section dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Selecting the chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Self-supporting body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Semitrailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Semitrailer coupling calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Semitrailer tractor vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Semitrailer tractor vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Shortening of wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Side underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Snow plough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Special tipper bodies on standard chassis . . . . 212
Special-purpose bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
358
Standard chassis for semitrailer tractor

vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Steerability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Storing and delivering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Storing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
T
Tab mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Tank and dry-bulk bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Without continuous mounting frames . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tank containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tapping cables to control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Technical advice and contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Dimensions of the power take-off coupling
flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349350
Engine-driven power take-off (NMV) . . . 161, 351355
Mounting directives for the
transmission-driven power take-off (NA) . . . 257348
PSM 3 parameter data record . . . . . . . . . . . . 242256
Technical threshold values for planning . . . . . . . . . 67
Telligent stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Third-party trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Tipper bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tipper pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Total vehicle height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Centre-axle trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Lowered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trailer coupling calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Trailing axle /leading axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

(NA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257348
Transmission-driven power take-off (NA) . . . . . . 160
Transport
of aggressive substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Transport of class 2 and 3 flammable
substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Type of angular bend, installation of
propeller shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Types of bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
U
Use of vehicle with centre-axle trailer . . . . . . . . 173
V
Van and box-type bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Vehicle
Preparation before delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Storing and delivering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Vehicle and model designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Actros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
Atego . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2530
Axor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2024
Econic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31??
Vehicle earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Vehicle safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicles
For the transport of aggressive substances . . . . . 218
Winter road service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
With disc brakes on the rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
With lifting trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
359
W
Warranty claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Waste disposal bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Weight distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Welded connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Welding work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Welding work on the frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Welding work on the vehicle frame . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Wheel housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Wheelbase extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Winter road service vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Wiring diagram (current draw up to
10 amps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wiring diagrams
Actros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Axor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Econic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Work on the compressed gas system . . . . . . . . . . . 95
360

Truck Body Mounting Directives 01-09-2006

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Truck Body Mounting Directives 01-09-2006

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Truck body/equipment mounting directives

Actros (BM 93X)

Amendments made to document dated 01.12.2005

Modifications to the basic vehicle

Technical threshold values for planning

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Technical threshold values for

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

5.13.1 Regulations and information sheets. . . . . . . . 94

Side underride guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

6.27 Lowered trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

The aim of these directives

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Before installing any attachments, special-purpose

To ensure operating and road safety of the chassis and

The following graphics show the distinction between the

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

You will find the following symbols used in these directives:

An environmental note gives you tips on the protection of the environment.

This symbol indicates the page on which you

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Risk of accident and injury

Before installing any attachments, special-purpose

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Before installing any attachments, special-purpose

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

+49 (0) 40 39 80-19 99

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Vehicle and model designations

These body/equipment mounting directives are valid for

Explanation of truck model designation:

Permissible gross weight in tons (solo vehicle)

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Permissible total gross weight

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Permissible total gross weight

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Permissible axle loads and

Permissible total gross weight

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Permissible total gross weight

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.

Permissible total gross weight

Mercedes-Benz body/equipment mounting directives for trucks Issue date: 30.06.2006

! Always print out complete sections from the current version.